Pioneer DVR 5100H VRB1317 A User Manual To The 50222ffb Ff1e 48ab 858a 5faad41245be
User Manual: Pioneer DVR-5100H to the manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 128 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read
through these operating instructions so you will know
how to operate your model properly. After you have
finished reading the instructions, put them away in a
safe place for future reference.
In some countries or regions, the shape of the power
plug and power outlet may differ from that shown in
the explanatory drawings. However, the method of
connecting and operating is the same.
VENTILAT ION: When installing this unit, make
sure to leav e space around the unit for ventilation to
improve heat radiation (at least 10cm at top, 10cm at
rear, and 10cm at each side).
WARN ING: Slot and openings in the cabinet are
provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable opera-
tion of the product and to protect it from overheating, to
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked and covered with items, such as new spapers,
table-cloths, curtains, etc. Also do not put the apparatus
on the thick carpet, bed, sofa, or fabric having a thick
pile.
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 2 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
This product includes FontAvenue (R) fonts licenced by NEC
Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC
Corporation
Operating Environment H045 En
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 °C – +3 5 °C (+41°F – +9 5 °F); less than 85%RH (cooli
vents not blocked)
Do not install in the follow ing locations
•Location exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial
light
•Location exposed to high humidity, or poorly
ventilated location
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 3 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
4
En
Contents
01 Before you start
Features
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
What’s in the box
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Putting the batteries in the remote control
. . . . . . . . . 8
Using the remote control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Disc / content format playback compatibility
. . . . . . . 9
About the internal hard disk drive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
02 Connecting up
Rear panel connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Front panel connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Extra features for use with compatible TVs
. . . . . . . . 13
Easy connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using other types of audio/video output
. . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver
. . . . . 16
Connecting an external decoder box (1)
. . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting an external decoder box (2)
. . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting to an AV amplifier
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting other AV sources
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Plugging in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
03 Controls and displays
Front panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Remote control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
04 Getting started
Switching on and setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for playback and
recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Making your first recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using the built-in TV tuner
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Basic playback
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using the Home Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Displaying disc information on-screen
. . . . . . . . . . . 34
05 Playback
Introduction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents
of a disc.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Navigating discs and the HDD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Scanning discs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Playing in slow motion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Frame advance/frame reverse
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
The Play Mode menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Displaying and switching subtitles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Switching DVD soundtracks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Switching the audio channel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Switching camera angles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
06 Recording
About DVD recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
About HDD recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Recording time and picture quality
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Restrictions on video recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Setting the picture quality/recording time
. . . . . . . . 49
Basic recording from the TV
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Setting a timer recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Timer recording FAQ
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Simultaneous recording and playback
. . . . . . . . . . . 56
Recording from an external component
. . . . . . . . . . 57
Automatic recording from a satellite tuner . . . . . . . . 57
Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Recording from the DV output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . 60
Initializing a DVD-RW disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
07 Copying and back-up
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
One Touch Copy* (HDD to DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
One Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Copying from HDD to DVD* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Copying from DVD to HDD* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Using disc back-up* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 4 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
5
En
English Français
Deutsch
Nederlands
Italiano Español
08 Editing
The Disc Navigator screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Disc Navigator menu options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Editing VR mode Original, Video mode and HDD
content
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Editing HDD groups
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Creating and editing a VR mode Play List
. . . . . . . . 82
09 Disc History
Using the Disc History
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
10 The PhotoViewer
Playing a slideshow
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
11 The Disc Setup menu
Basic settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Initialize settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
HDD Initialize
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Finalize settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
12 The Video/Audio Adjust menu
Setting the picture quality for TV and external
inputs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Setting the picture quality for disc playback
. . . . . . 92
Audio DRC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Virtual Surround
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
13 The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Basic settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Tuner settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Video In / Out settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Audio In settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Audio Out settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Language settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Recording settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Playback settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
14 Additional information
Resetting the recorder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Setting up the remote to control your TV
. . . . . . . . 109
Screen sizes and disc formats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Frequently asked questions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
About DV
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Manual recording modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Language code list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Country code list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
On-screen displays and recorder displays
. . . . . . . 117
Handling discs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Storing discs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Damaged discs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Cleaning the pickup lens
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Condensation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Hints on installation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Moving the recorder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Glossary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
* Note on copying:
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you
are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in
which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as
films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or
consented to by the rightowners.
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 5 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Before you start
01
6
En
Chapter 1
Before you start
Features
• HDD recording
You can record up to 102 hours of video (in EP mode) on
the internal 80 GB hard disk drive (HDD). With both
recordable DVD and a high-capacity HDD in the same
recorder, you have the flexibility to keep recordings on the
HDD for quick access anytime, or record to DVD for
archiving or playing on other DVD players.
• Copy between HDD and DVD
You can copy recordings from the HDD to recordable
DVD, or from DVD to the HDD. Usually you can use the
high-speed copy feature, which can copy an hour of video
in under three minutes (when recorded in EP mode).
You can also choose to copy material at a different
recording quality from the original. For example, you
might want to copy a FINE mode (highest quality)
recording on the HDD to SP (standard play) quality on a
DVD so that you can fit other recordings on the same
disc.
• One Touch Copy
One Touch Copy makes copying the currently playing title
from HDD to DVD, or DVD to HDD as simple as pressing
a button.
• Chase play
Using chase play you can start watching a recording
before the recording has finished. For example, you could
set a timer recording for a program that you’re going to
miss the first 15 minutes of, then start watching while the
recorder is still recording the program 15 minutes ahead
of you.
• Simultaneous recording and playback
Playback and recording for both DVDs and the built-in
hard disk drive (HDD) are completely independent. For
example you can record a broadcast program to either a
recordable DVD or the HDD, while watching another
recording you already made on the same DVD or on the
HDD.
• Disc Navigator
The Disc Navigator makes editing and finding your way
around a disc easy by displaying a frame from each title
(or chapter within a title) as a visual reminder of what the
title (or chapter) is.
• Disc History
The Disc History screen shows disc information,
including how much free space remains for recording,
for the last 30 recordable discs loaded in the recorder.
Every time you load a recordable disc, the Disc History is
automatically updated with the latest information.
• Home Menu
The Home Menu gives you on-screen access to all the
recorder’s features in one convenient place, from setting
up the recorder, to programming a timer recording and
editing a recording.
• Cinema surround sound in your home
Connect this recorder to a Dolby Digital and/or DTS-
compatible amplifier/receiver to enjoy full surround
sound effects from Dolby Digital and DTS DVD discs.
• Easy Timer Recording
Setting the recorder to record a program is simple from
the Easy Timer Recording screen. Graphically set the
start and end times of the recording, enter the channel
number and change the recording quality if you want to.
That’s it!
• Program up to 32 timer recordings
You can program the recorder to record up to 32
programs, up to a month in advance, using the
ShowView
®
system
*1
for easy programming if you want.
As well as single programs, you can specify daily or
weekly recordings, too.
This recorder is also compatible with VPS/PDC systems,
which ensure you don’t miss a timer recording, even if
the broadcast is not running to schedule.
is a registered trademark of Gemstar
Development Corporation.
The ShowView system is manufactured under licence
from Gemstar Development Corporation.
• One-touch recording
Use one-touch recording to start recording immediately
in 30 minute blocks. Each time you press the record
button, the recording time is extended by another 30
minutes.
• Optimized recording
Optimized recording adjusts the recording quality
automatically if a timer recording will not fit onto a disc
with the settings that you made.
HDD
VR mode HDD
VR mode HDD
®
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 6 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Before you start 01
7
En
English
• Auto Start Recording from satellite receiver or
other set top box
With a satellite receiver or other set top box connected to
the
INPUT 3/AUTO START REC
inputs of this recorder,
you can start and stop recording automatically according
to the timer settings of the set top box.
• High quality 16-bit Linear PCM audio
When recording using one of the high quality record
settings (
FINE
or
MN32
), the audio is recorded in
uncompressed 16-bit Linear PCM format. This delivers
great sounding audio to accompany the high picture
quality. See
Setting the picture quality/recording time
on
page 49 for more on recording modes.
• Picture quality adjustment features
During playback, you can adjust various picture quality
settings to improve the picture. You can also adjust the
recording picture quality. For example, if you want to
make a DVD copy of an old video tape, you can optimize
the picture quality before transferring it to disc.
• Find what you want to watch quickly and easily
Unlike video tape that needs to be wound to the correct
place, you can jump right to the part of a DVD disc that
you want to watch. Search for a point on a disc by title,
chapter or time.
• Manual recording
In addition to the four preset recording quality modes
(
FINE
,
SP
,
LP
and
EP
), the manual recording mode allows
you to access 32 different recording quality/time settings,
giving you very fine control over the recording.
• Record to and from a DV camcorder
This recorder has a built-in DV (Digital Video) input/
output jack for connection to a DV camcorder. This
makes it ideal for transferring camcorder footage to DVD
or HDD for editing. You can also transfer DVD or HDD
content back to the camcorder if you need to.
• Safe, non-destructive editing
When you edit a DVD-RW, the actual content of the disc
(the Original content) is not touched. The edited version
(the Play List content) just points to various parts of the
Original content.
• Chapter marking
You can easily add chapter markers anywhere in your
recordings for easy editing.
•Play Video mode recordings on a regular DVD
player
Discs recorded using the Video mode can be played back
on regular DVD players, including computer DVD drives
compatible with DVD-Video playback
*2
.
*2
‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-
Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs
is referred to as recording in ‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s
DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD-
RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD
playback equipment, and there is DVD playback
equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs
recorded in the DVD-Video format.
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.
• WMA, MP3 and JPEG file playback
This recorder can play WMA and MP3 audio files and
JPEG picture files on CD-R, CD-RW or CD-ROM discs
(see
Disc / content format playback compatibility
on
page 9).
• Disc Back-up
The disc back-up feature gives you a convenient way to
back-up important material on DVD to another
recordable DVD disc. The material is first copied to the
HDD, then on to a second DVD disc.
• Recovery Recording
When a timer recording is set to use DVD but the disc
loaded at the time of the recording is unrecordable, the
program will automatically be recorded to the HDD.
• Auto Replace Recording
This feature is useful for regular timer recordings of a TV
program which you don’t want to keep after watching.
Each time the program is recorded, it replaces the one
currently on the HDD. There’s no need to manually delete
it later.
VR mode
Note on copying:
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you
are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in
which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as
films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or
consented to by the rightowners.
VR mode HDD
Video mode
HDD
HDD
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 7 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Before you start
01
8
En
What’s in the box
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please
confirm that the following accessories are in the box
when you open it.
• Remote control
• AA/R6P dry cell batteries x2
• Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow)
• RF antenna cable
• Power cable
• These operating instructions
• Warranty card
Putting the batteries in the remote
control
1 Open the battery compartment cover on the
back of the remote control.
2 Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery
compartment following the indications (,) inside
the compartment.
3 Close the cover.
Note
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as
leakage and bursting. Please observe the following:
• Don’t mix new and old batteries together.
• Don’t use different kinds of battery together—
although they may look similar, different batteries
may have different voltages.
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each
battery match the indications in the battery
compartment.
•Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to
be used for a month or more.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or
area.
Using the remote control
Keep in mind the following when using the remote
control:
• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the
remote and the remote sensor on the unit.
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s
remote sensor.
•Remote controllers for different devices can interfere
with each other. Avoid using remotes for other
equipment located close to this unit.
•Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the
operating range of the remote.
• When the batteries run down or you change the
batteries, the remote control mode and TV preset
codes are automatically reset. See Remote Control
Set on page 96 and Setting up the remote to control
your TV on page 109 to reset them.
•Use within the operating range and angle, as shown.
• You can control this recorder using the remote
sensor of another Pioneer component using the
CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel
connections on page 12 for more information.
30
30
7m
01 Before_You_Start.fm 8 ページ ２００３年９月１７日 水曜日 午後８時１４分
Before you start 01
9
En
English
Disc / content format playback
compatibility
General disc compatibility
This recorder was designed and engineered to be
compatible with software bearing one or more of the
following logos:
• Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD
•
is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.
This recorder supports the IEC’s Super VCD standard.
Compared to the Video CD standard, Super VCD offers
superior picture quality, and allows two soundtracks to
be recorded. Super VCD also supports the widescreen
size.
Other formats, including but not limited to the following,
are not playable in this recorder:
DVD-Audio / SACD / DVD-RAM
DVD-ROM / CD-ROM*
* Except those that contain WMA, MP3 or JPEG. See also
Compressed audio compatibility and JPEG file
compatibility below.
DVD-R/RW and CD-R/RW discs recorded using a DVD
recorder, CD recorder or personal computer may not be
playable in this recorder. This may be caused by a
number of possibilities, including but not limited to: the
type of disc used; the type of recording; damage, dirt or
condensation on either the disc or the pick-up lens. See
below for notes about particular software and formats.
DVD-R/RW compatibility
This recorder will play and record DVD-R/RW discs that
use DVD-Video format (Video mode), and DVD-RW discs
that use the Video Recording (VR) format. It is compatible
with DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 and Ver. 1.1 / 2x, and DVD-R Ver.
2.0 and Ver. 2.0 / 4x.
CD-R/RW compatibility
This recorder will play CD-R and CD-RW discs recorded
in CD Audio or Video CD format, or as a CD-ROM
containing MP3, WMA or JPEG files. However, any other
content may cause the disc not to play, or create noise/
distortion in the output.
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.
PC-created disc compatibility
If you record a disc using a personal computer, even if it
is recorded in a "compatible format" as listed above, there
will be cases in which the disc may not be playable in this
recorder due to the setting of the application software
used to create the disc. In these particular instances,
check with the software publisher for more detailed
information.
Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes
for additional compatibility information.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility
The Windows Media logo printed on the box indicates
that this recorder can playback WMA data.
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an
audio compression technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using
Windows Media Player version 9 (or less) or Windows
Media Player for Windows XP.
Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks,
or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Compressed audio compatibility
This recorder will play CD-ROM, CD-R, and CD-RW discs
containing files saved in the MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3)
or Windows Media Audio (WMA) format with a sampling
rate of 44.1 or 48kHz. Incompatible files will not play and
the message
Cannot play this file format
will be
displayed (
CAN’T PLAY
in the front panel display).
DVD-Video DVD-R DVD-RW
Video CD
Fujicolor CD
Audio CD CD-R CD-RW
VIDEO
CD
Super Video CD (Super VCD)
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 9 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Before you start
01
10
En
Fixed bit-rate MP3 files are recommended. Variable bit-
rate (VBR) MP3 files are playable, but playing time may
not be shown correctly.
This recorder is compatible with 44.1 and 48 kHz WMA
files encoded with Windows Media Codec 8. Files
encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable,
but some parts of the specification are not supported
(specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR WMA files).
DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy protection is a
technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by
restricting playback, etc. of material on devices other
than the PC (or other WMA recording equipment) used to
record it. For detailed information, please see the
instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC
(or other WMA recording equipment) and/or software.
WMA files encoded with DRM (Digital Rights
Management) copy protection will not play and the
message
Cannot play this file format
will be displayed
(
CAN’T PLAY
in the front panel display).
The CD-ROM used to compile your WMA/MP3 files must
be ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format:
Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems
are both compatible with this recorder.
Use CD-R or CD-RW media for recording your files. The
disc must be finalized (i.e. the session must be closed) in
order to play in this recorder.
This recorder only plays tracks that are named with the
file extension .MP3 or .WMA (upper or lower-case).
When naming MP3 and WMA files, add the
corresponding file name extension (.mp3 or .wma). Files
are played according to the file extension. To prevent
noise and malfunctions, do not use these extensions for
other kinds of files.
This recorder can recognize up to 99 folders and 999 files
(WMA/MP3). If a disc exceeds these limits, only files and
folders up to these limits will be playable. Files and
folders are read/displayed in alphabetical order. Note
that if the file structure is very complex, you may not be
able to read/play all files on the disc.
Folder, track and file names (excluding the file extension)
are displayed.
There are many different recording bit-rates available to
encode MP3 files. This recorder has been designed to be
compatible with all of them. Audio encoded at 128Kbps
should sound close to regular CD Audio quality. This
recorder will play lower bit-rate files, but please note that
the sound quality becomes noticeably worse at lower bit-
rates.
JPEG file compatibility
This recorder is compatible with Fujicolor CD and Kodak
Picture CD formats, as well as CD-R/RW/ROM discs
containing JPEG files.
Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2
*1
still image files are
supported (horizontal resolution from 160–5120 pixels;
vertical resolution between 120–3840 pixels).
*1
File format used by digital still cameras
The CD-ROM used to compile your JPEG files must be
ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format:
Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems
are both compatible with this recorder.
This recorder only displays files that are named with the
file extension .jpg, .jpeg, .jif, or .jfif (upper or lower-case).
The recorder can load up to 99 folders and 999 files at one
time. If there are more files/folders than this on the disc
then more can be reloaded.
Frequently asked questions
• What’s the difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW?
The most important difference between DVD-R and
DVD-RW is that DVD-R is a record-once medium,
while DVD-RW is a re-recordable/erasable medium.
You can re-record/erase a DVD-RW disc
approximately 1,000 times.
For more information, see
About DVD recording
on
page 47.
•What’s VR mode?
VR (Video Recording) mode is a special mode
designed for home DVD recording. It allows very
flexible editing of recorded material compared to
‘Video mode’. On the other hand, Video mode discs
are more compatible with other DVD players.
•Can I play my recordable discs in a regular DVD player?
Generally, DVD-R discs and DVD-RW discs recorded
in Video mode
*2
are playable in a regular DVD player,
but they must be ‘finalized’ first. This process fixes
the contents of the disc to make them readable to
other DVD players as DVD-Video discs.
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR (Video Recording)
mode are playable in some players.
This indicates a product feature that is capable
of playing DVD-RW discs recorded with Video
Recording format.
Note that Pioneer cannot guarantee that discs
recorded using this recorder will play on other players.
*2
‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-
Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs
is referred to as recording in ‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s
DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD-
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 10 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Before you start 01
11
En
English
RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD
playback equipment, and there is DVD playback
equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs
recorded in the DVD-Video format.
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.
This recorder supports the recording of ‘copy-once’
broadcast programs using the CPRM copy protection
system (see CPRM on page 48) on CPRM-compliant
DVD-RW discs in VR mode. CPRM recordings can only
be played on players that are specifically compatible
with CPRM.
• Do I need two DVD recorders for editing? What kind of
editing can I do?
Unlike editing video tape, you only need one DVD
recorder to edit discs. With DVD, you edit by making a
‘Play List’ of what to play and when to play it. On
playback, the recorder plays the disc according to the
Play List.
Throughout this manual, you will often see the words
Original and Play List to refer to the actual content and
the edited version.
•
Original
content refers to what’s actually recorded
on the disc.
•
Play List
content refers to the edited version of the
disc—how the Original content is to be played.
About the internal hard disk drive
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of
equipment. Please use the recorder following the
guidelines below to protect against possible HDD failure.
We recommend that you back up your important
recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs in order to protect against
accidental loss.
• Do not move the recorder while it is on.
•Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.
• Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid
places, or in places that may be subject to sudden
changes in temperature. Sudden changes in
temperature can cause condensation to form inside
the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.
• While the recorder is switched on, do not unplug
from the wall socket or switch the electricity off from
the breaker switch.
• Do not move the recorder immediately after
switching it off. If you need to move the recorder,
please follow the steps below:
1
After the message
POWER OFF
is shown in the
display, wait at least two minutes.
2
Unplug from the wall socket.
3
Move the player.
• If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on
there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be
lost.
• The HDD is very delicate. If used improperly or in an
unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD
will fail after a few years of use. Signs of problems
include playback unexpectedly freezing and
noticeable block noise (mozaic) in the picture.
However, sometimes there will be no warning signs
of HDD failure.
If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded material will
be possible. In this case it will be necessary to
replace the HDD unit.
Original
Title 1
Play List
Title 2Title 1
Title 3Title 2
Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Chapter 2Chapter 3Chapter 2
Chapter 2Chapter 1Chapter 2
Chapter 1
Chapter 1
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 11 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Connecting up
02
12
En
Chapter 2
Connecting up
Rear panel connections
1 ANTENNA IN/OUT
Connect your TV antenna to the
ANTENNA IN
jack. The
signal is passed through to the
ANTENNA OUT
jack for
connection to your TV.
2AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector
Audio/video input SCART-type connector for connecting
to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART connector.
The input accepts video and S-video. See
AV2/L1 In
on
page 99 for how to set this up.
3 AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector
Audio/video output SCART-type connector for
connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The video output is switchable between video,
S-video and RGB. See page
AV1 Out
on page 99 for how
to set this up.
4 DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL
For connecting to an AV receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS/
MPEG decoder or other equipment with optical digital
input.
5 CONTROL IN
Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of
another Pioneer component with a
CONTROL OUT
terminal and bearing the Pioneer
mark. Connect the
CONTROL OUT
of the other component to the
CONTROL
IN
of this recorder using a mini-plug cord.
6 AC IN – Power inlet
7 INPUT 3/AUTO START REC jacks
Audio/video inputs (stereo analog audio; video and
S-video) that you can use to connect to a satellite
receiver, TV, VCR or other source component for
recording.
8 OUTPUT jacks
Audio/video outputs (stereo analog audio; video and
S-video) that you can use to connect to a TV, monitor, AV
receiver or other equipment.
Front panel connections
On the left side of the front panel a flip-down cover hides
a second audio/video input, consisting of a video and
S-video jack, and stereo analog audio jacks. (You can also
connect a mono source using just the
L(MONO)
jack.)
On the right side is the DV input/output i.LINK connector.
This is for connection to a DV camcorder.
DIGITAL
OUT AC IN
OPTICAL
CONTROL
IN
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
AV 2/(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV 1 (RGB)-TV
RL RL
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
INPUT 3/AUTO START REC
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
1 2
7 8
3 4 5 6
VIDEO/R/RW
INPUT 2
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
DV IN/OUT
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 12 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Connecting up 02
13
En
English
Extra features for use with
compatible TVs
When this recorder is connected to a TV that features T-V
Link, EasyLink, MegaLogic, SMARTLINK, Q-Link, DATA
LOGIC or NexTView Link using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART
cable (not supplied), the following functions are
available:
• Direct TV recording
• Channel preset download
• Electronic Program Guide (EPG) download
• TV auto power on
• System configuration
Direct TV recording
Direct TV recording allows you to record the TV program
that you’re watching, without having to worry about
whether this recorder is set to the same channel. See
Direct recording from TV
on page 50 for more on this
feature.
Channel preset download
This feature allows you to set up the channel presets of
this recorder very simply using the channel presets and
preset names already in your TV. See
Switching on and
setting up
on page 25 and
Auto Channel Setting :
Download from TV
on page 97 for more on this feature.
EPG download
EPG download allows you to program a timer recording
directly from the electronic program guide displayed on
your TV.
See the manual that came with your TV for more
information on how to use this feature. Note that the
SP
and
LP
options displayed on your TV correspond to the
SP
and
LP
recording modes on this recorder.
TV auto power on
When you play a disc in this recorder, the TV
automatically turns on and switches to the correct video
input. See the manual that came with your TV for how to
use this feature.
System configuration
Basic settings, including language, country and TV
screen size (aspect ratio), can be downloaded from your
TV to help set up this recorder for use.
Note
•For further details and compatibility information, see
also the manual that came with your TV.
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 13 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Connecting up
02
14
En
Easy connections
The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programs, and play discs. Other
types of connections are explained starting on the following page.
Important
• These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART connection, see
the following page for connecting up using the supplied audio/video cable.
• The
AV1(RGB)-TV
AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo analog audio.
The
AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER)
connector accepts ordinary and S-video video input, as well as stereo analog audio.
See
AV1 Out
on page 99 and
AV2/L1 In
on page 99 for how to set them up.
• Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and
unplugged from the wall outlet.
1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR.
•If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect
it to the
ANTENNA IN
jack on this recorder and skip
the next step.
2 Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to
connect the antenna output of your VCR to the
ANTENNA IN of this recorder.
3 Use another RF antenna cable to connect the
ANTENNA OUT of this recorder to the antenna input
on your TV.
4 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the
SCART AV connector on your TV.
5 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/
(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your VCR.
Note
• See the following page if you want to use one of the
other kinds of audio/video connection.
Tip
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby,
Power Save
must be set to
Off
—see
Power
Save
on page 95).
TV
VCR
DIGITAL
OUT AC IN
OPTICAL
CONTROL
IN
VHF/UHF
IN
OUT
AV 2/INPUT 1 AV 1(RGB)-TV
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
RL RL
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
INPUT 3/AUTO START REC
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
IN
ANTENNA
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
1
2
4
5
3
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 14 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Connecting up 02
15
En
English
Using other types of audio/video output
If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to connect your TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output
jacks, as well as an S-video output.
Using the supplied audio/video cable
1Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input
on your TV.
Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable for
the video connection.
2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/video
cable for the audio connection. Make sure you match up
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs
for correct stereo sound.
Using the S-video output
1 Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect
the S-VIDEO OUTPUT to an S-video input on your TV,
monitor (or other equipment).
2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the
yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs
for correct stereo sound.
TV
DIGITAL
OUT AC IN
OPTICAL
CONTROL
IN
VHF/UHF
IN
OUT
AV 2/INPUT 1 AV 1(RGB)-TV
RL RL
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
INPUT 3/AUTO START REC
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO
INPUT
12
TV
DIGITAL
OUT AC IN
OPTICAL
CONTROL
IN
VHF/UHF
IN
OUT
AV 2/INPUT 1 AV 1(RGB)-TV
RL RL
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
INPUT 3/AUTO START REC
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO
INPUT
1
2
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 15 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Connecting up
02
16
En
Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver
If you have a cable or satellite receiver with a built-in decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this
page. If you are using a separate decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up following the instructions on the next
page.
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box/satellite tuner.
Important
•Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component
directly to your TV or AV receiver.
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/
(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your satellite/cable box.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
Note
• The diagram shows SCART video connections, but
you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video
connections.
Tip
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby,
Power Save
must be set to
Off
—see
Power
Save
on page 95).
TV
DIGITAL
OUT AC IN
OPTICAL
CONTROL
IN
VHF/UHF
IN
OUT
AV 2/INPUT 1 AV 1(RGB)-TV
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
Cable/Satellite box
RL RL
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
INPUT 3/AUTO START REC
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
IN
ANTENNA
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
1
1
2
3
1
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 16 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Connecting up 02
17
En
English
Connecting an external decoder box (1)
If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on this
page.
Important
• Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder.
• Information from the decoder (for example, relating to pay TV services), is only viewable when this recorder is off
(in standby).
•For timer recording to work properly on this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be switched
on during recording.
• It is not possible to watch one TV program and record another using this setup.
1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box.
2Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your
decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.
See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed
instructions.
3Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box to the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV connector on this recorder.
4 Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV
AV connector to your TV.
TV
DIGITAL
OUT AC IN
OPTICAL
CONTROL
IN
VHF/UHF
IN
OUT
AV 2/INPUT 1 AV 1(RGB)-TV
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
VCR/Satellite receiver
/Cable box
Decoder
RL RL
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
INPUT 3/AUTO START REC
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
IN
1
4
2
3
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 17 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Connecting up
02
18
En
Connecting an external decoder box (2)
If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page.
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Record scrambled channels received using the recorder’s built-in TV tuner.
Important
•Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component
directly to your TV or AV receiver.
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/
(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your decoder box.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
Note
• In order to use this setup, you will need to make the
following settings from the Initial Setup menu:
– Set the
AV2/L1 In
setting to
Decoder
from the
Initial Setup menu (see
AV2/L1 In
on page 99).
– From the
Manual CH Setting
screen, set the
Decoder
setting for the scrambled channels to
On
(see
Manual CH Setting
on page 97).
TV
DIGITAL
OUT AC IN
OPTICAL
CONTROL
IN
VHF/UHF
IN
OUT
AV 2/INPUT 1 AV 1(RGB)-TV
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
Decoder
RL RL
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
INPUT 3/AUTO START REC
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
IN
1
2
3
1
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 18 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Connecting up 02
19
En
English
Connecting to an AV amplifier
To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amplifier/receiver using the digital
optical output.
In addition to a digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog connection for
compatibility with all discs and sources.
You’ll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amplifier/receiver. Use the ordinary video output (as
shown here), or the S-video output.
Important
• Noise may be output from your speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amplifier/receiver
properly (see
Audio Out settings
on page 101).
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
2Connect one of the
DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL
jack on
this recorder to an optical digital input on your AV
receiver.
This enables you to listen to multichannel surround
sound.
3 Connect the analog AUDIO OUTPUT and VIDEO
OUTPUT jacks on this recorder to an analog audio
and video input on your AV receiver.
4 Connect the AV receiver’s video output to a
video input on your TV.
Note
• The diagram shows ordinary video connections,
but you can alternatively use an AV connector or
S-video connections, if they’re available.
Important
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’
your VCR using A/V cables. Always connect it directly
to your TV.
TV
AV amp/
receiver
DIGITAL
OUT AC IN
OPTICAL
CONTROL
IN
VHF/UHF
IN
OUT
AV 2/INPUT 1 AV 1(RGB)-TV
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
RL RL
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
INPUT 3/AUTO START REC
AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
IN
DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL
A/V
IN 1
VIDEO
OUT
1
3 2
1
4
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 19 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Connecting up
02
20
En
Connecting other AV sources
Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder
1Connect a set of audio and video outputs on your
VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder.
This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or
camcorder.
• You can use ordinary video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
• The front panel connections make convenient
connections for a camcorder.
2Connect a set of audio and video inputs on your
VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this
recorder.
This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR
or camcorder.
• You can use ordinary video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
• Alternatively, you can use the
AV2/(INPUT 1/
DECODER)
SCART connector for audio/video input
and output with just one SCART cable.
Connecting a DV camcorder
Using the front panel
DV IN/OUT
jack, it is possible to
connect a DV camcorder or video deck, or DVD-R/RW
recorder and digitally transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/RW
discs to DVD-R/RW.
Important
•This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is
not compatible with digital satellite tuners or D-VHS
video decks.
1 Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV
in/out jack on your DV camcorder/deck to the front
panel DV IN/OUT jack of this recorder.
Plugging in
Before plugging in for the first time, make sure that
everything is connected properly.
1Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC IN
inlet and the other end into a standard household
power outlet.
Analog camcorder
VCR
VIDEO/R/RW
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
1 2
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
DV camcorder
VIDEO/R/RW
DV
IN/OUT
DV
IN/OUT
AC IN
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 20 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Controls and displays 03
21
En
English
Chapter 3
Controls and displays
Front panel
1
STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
2 HDD/DVD
Press to switch between hard disk drive (HDD) and DVD
for recording and playback.
3 DVD disc tray
4
OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
5
STOP
Press to stop playback.
6
PAUSE
Press to pause/restart playback or recording.
7
PLAY
Press to start or restart playback.
8 FUNCTION
Press repeatedly to set the function of the
SMART JOG
dial. The function is shown in the display.
9 SMART JOG dial
10
STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
11
REC
Press to start recording.
12 Front panel inputs
(page 12)
Pull the cover down where indicated to access the front
panel input jacks. Especially convenient for connecting
camcorders and other portable equipment.
13 HDD indicator
Lights when the HDD is selected for playback/recording.
14 Front panel display
See
Display
on page 22 for details.
15 IR remote sensor
(page 8)
16 DV IN/OUT jack
(page 12)
Digital input/output jack for use with a DV camcorder.
STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE STOP PAUSE PLAY STOP REC
FUNCTION REC
DV IN/OUT
HDD / DVD
PULL–OPEN
VIDEO/R/RW
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1615141312
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 21 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Controls and displays
03
22
En
Display
1
/
Arrows indicate the copy direction between the HDD
() and DVD ( ).
2
PLAY /
REC indicators
Lights during playback / recording; blinks when playback
/ recording is paused.
3
(page 28)
The ‘
’ and ‘
’ indicators light to indicate that the HDD
or DVD is selected for recording/playback.
4 PL
(page 74)
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is
in Play List mode.
52 3
(page 96)
Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is displayed,
the remote control mode is 1).
6 REM
Lights when the character display is showing the
remaining available recording time.
7V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded.
8R / RW
Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or
DVD-RW.
9
(page 51)
Lights when a timer recording has been set.
(Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has
been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)
AUTO
(page 57)
Lights when Auto Start Recording has been set, and
during Auto Start Recording.
10 Recording quality indicators
(page 47)
FINE
Lights when the recording mode is set to
FINE
(best
quality).
SP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
SP
(standard play).
LP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
LP
(long
play).
EP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
EP
(extended play).
MN
Lights when the recording mode is set to
MN
(manual recording level) mode.
11 Character display
12
(page 101)
Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast
are recorded.
13 VPS / PDC
(page 51)
Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a
VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording.
14 NTSC
Lights when playing NTSC format video.
15 OVER
(page 101)
Lights when the analog audio input level is too high.
1312 14 15
11
45 6 7 8
910
321
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 22 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Controls and displays 03
23
En
English
Remote control
1 ONE TOUCH COPY
(page 63)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD.
2 Remote control indicator
Lights when setting up the remote control for use with a
TV (page 109) and when setting the remote control mode
(page 96).
3
STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
4
OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
5HDD
(page 28)
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for recording or
playback.
6DVD
(page 28)
Press to select the DVD for recording or playback.
7 DVD playback functions
AUDIO
(page 45)
Changes the audio language or channel. (When the
recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner
audio.)
SUBTITLE
(page 45)
Displays/changes the subtitles included in
multilingual DVD-Video discs.
ANGLE
(page 46)
Switches camera angles on discs with multi-angle
scenes.
8 PLAY MODE
(page 42)
Press to display the Play Mode menu (for features such
as search, repeat and program play).
9 TV/DVD
(page 30)
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get the
picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD mode’,
in which you get picture and sound from the recorder’s
tuner (or an external input).
10 Alphanumeric buttons and CLEAR
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection;
channel selection, and so on. The same buttons can also
be used to enter names for titles, discs and so on.
Use
CLEAR
to clear an entry and start again.
11 INPUT SELECT
(page 57)
Press to change the input to use for recording.
12 CHANNEL +/–
(page 29)
Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.
13 S
HOW
V
IEW
(page 54)
Press, then use the number buttons to enter a ShowView
programming number for timer recording.
14 DISC NAVIGATOR
(page 37, 74)
/ TOP MENU
(page 31)
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top
menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded.
15 PLAY LIST
(page 76)
/ MENU
(page 31)
Press to switch between Original and Play List content on
VR mode discs, or display the disc menu if a DVD-Video
disc is loaded.
16
///
(cursor buttons) and ENTER
Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press
ENTER
to
select the currently highlighted option.
17 HOME MENU
(page 33)
Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can
navigate all the functions of the recorder.
18 RETURN
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or
display.
DVD RECORDER
STANDBY/ON ONE TOUCH
COPY
OPEN/CLOSE
TOP MENU MENU
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR PLAY LIST
HOME
MENU
DISC
HISTORY NAVI
MARK
CASE
SELECTION
CHP
MARK EASY
TIMER
INPUT
SELECT
INPUT
SELECT
TV/DVD
ABC
AUDIO
HDD DVD
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
DEF
GHI JKL MNO
PQRS TUV WXYZ
SHOWVIEW +
TV DIRECT
REC
DISPLAY
ENTER
CLEAR
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV
PAUSE STOP OK CM SKIP
REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN
NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC REC MODE TIMER REC
1 2
4
8
12
15
18
3
5
13
14
16
17
19
20
23
7
21
6
11
9
22
24
10
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 23 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Controls and displays
03
24
En
19 Playback controls
(page 30)
REV SCAN / FWD SCAN
(page 40)
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press
again to change the speed.
PLAY
Press to start playback.
PAUSE
Press to pause playback or recording.
STOP
Press to stop playback.
CM SKIP
Press to skip 30 seconds forward on the disc (about
the length of a typical TV commercial); press
repeatedly to skip up to 4 minutes.
PREV / NEXT
Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/
track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu
page.
STEP/SLOW
(page 41)
During playback, press to start slow-motion
playback; while paused, press to show the previous
or next video frame.
20 Recording controls
(page 28)
REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
recording time in blocks of 30 mins.
STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
REC MODE
(page 49)
Press repeatedly to change the recording mode
(picture quality).
TIMER REC
(page 52)
Press to set a timer recording from the standard
Timer Recording screen.
EASY TIMER
(page 51)
Press to set a timer recording from the Easy Timer
screen.
21 DISC HISTORY
(page 86)
Press to display summary information (disc name,
recording time left, etc.) from the last 30 recordable
discs loaded.
NAVI MARK
(page 38)
Press to select a thumbnail picture for the current
title for use in the Disc Navigator screen.
CHP MARK
(page 79)
Press to insert a chapter marker when playing/
recording a VR mode DVD-RW disc or the HDD.
22 DISPLAY
(page 34)
Displays/changes the on-screen information displays.
23 TV CONTROL
(page 109)
After setting up, use these controls to control your TV.
24 TV DIRECT REC
(page 50)
Press to start recording whatever channel your TV is set
to.
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 24 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Getting started 04
25
En
English
Chapter 4
Getting started
Switching on and setting up
When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you
can make several basic settings using the Setup
Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the
clock, the internal TV tuner and the video and audio
output settings.
If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly
recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting
to use the recorder.
1Switch on your TV and set the video input to this
recorder.
2Press the
STANDBY/ON button on the remote
control or the front panel to switch on.
When you switch on for the first time, your TV should
display the Setup Navigator screen. (If the Setup
Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the
Initial Setup menu; see page 96).
•If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using
a full-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will take
a few seconds to download country, TV screen size
and language information. (Check the manual that
came with your TV for compatibility information.)
3Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to choose
a language, then press ENTER.
4 Press ENTER to start setting up using the Setup
Navigator.
•If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press
(cursor down) to select
Cancel
, then press
ENTER
to
exit the Setup Navigator.
5 Select the Auto Channel Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or
‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do not set’, then press
ENTER.
DVD RECORDER
STANDBY/ON
ENTER
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Set
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup NavigatorSetup Navigator
Language
English
français
Deutsch
Italiano
Español
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Set
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup NavigatorSetup Navigator
Start
Cancel
Complete this setup before you
start using your recorder.
Please use the Initial Setup if you
want to make more detailed settings.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Set
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup NavigatorSetup Navigator
Auto Channel Setting
Auto Scan
Download from TV
Do not set
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 25 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Getting started
04
26
En
• Select
Do not set
if you want to skip setting up the
channels (because they have already been set up, for
example).
• You can only use the
Download from TV
feature if
you connected this recorder to your TV using a
fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable connected to the
AV1(RGB)-TV
connector, and if your TV supports this
function (check your TV’s instruction manual for
more details).
• Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to
choose your country, then press ENTER.
• Auto-tuning channels
The
Auto Scan
option automatically scans and sets the
channel presets.
• Downloading channels from your TV
Use the
Download from TV
option to download all the
channels that your TV is tuned to.
6 Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting, or
‘Manual’ to set the clock manually, then press
ENTER.
• Auto clock setting
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together
with the program. This recorder can use these
signals to set the clock automatically.
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number
that broadcasts a clock signal, then move the
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.
The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After
you see that the time has been set, select
Next
to
proceed.
If the time could not be set automatically, press
RETURN
to go back to the previous screen and select
Manual
.
• Manual clock setting
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time
signals, you can set the clock manually.
Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to set
your time zone.
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative
to GMT.
Press
(cursor down) then use the
/
(cursor
left/right) buttons to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for
summer time, then press ENTER.
Select
On
if you are currently using summer time.
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Set
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup NavigatorSetup Navigator
Country Selection
Country Austria
Initial Setup
Tuning
32/213
Cancel
Downloading
Cancel
Pr 5
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Set
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup NavigatorSetup Navigator
Clock Setting
Auto
Manual
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Set
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup NavigatorSetup Navigator
Auto Clock Setting
Date
Time
Clock Set CH
Pr 1
Start
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Set
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup NavigatorSetup Navigator
Auto Clock Setting
Date
Time
Clock Set CH
Pr 1
Start
Next
Initial Setup
0101 2003
WED
11 20
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Set
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup NavigatorSetup Navigator
Manual Clock Setting
Time Zone
Summer Time
Off
1/2
Austria
Vienna
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Set
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup NavigatorSetup Navigator
On
Austria
Vienna
Manual Clock Setting
Time Zone
Summer Time
1/2
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 26 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Getting started 04
27
En
English
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then
press ENTER to make all the settings.
Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to change
the value in the highlighted field.
Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to move
from one field to another.
•You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in
the Setup Navigator by pressing
RETURN
.
7 Select the TV screen type, ‘Standard (4:3)’ or
‘Wide (16:9)’.
Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to select, then
press
ENTER
.
8Is this recorder connected to an AV amplifier for
digital audio?
Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to select
Connected
, or
Not Connected
, then press
ENTER
.
• If you select
Not Connected
, that completes the
setup. Press
ENTER
to exit the Setup Navigator, or
select
Go Back
if you want to go back and start again.
• Select the digital audio formats your AV amplifier is
compatible with.
Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to select
Dolby
Digital
,
Dolby Digital, DTS
or
PCM only
, then press
ENTER
.
•Check the operating instructions that came with your
AV amplifier if you’re not sure what it’s compatible
with.
9Is your AV amplifier compatible with 96 kHz PCM
digital audio?
Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to select
Compatible
,
Not Compatible
, or
Don’t Know
, then
press
ENTER
.
•Check the operating instructions that came with your
AV amplifier if you’re not sure.
10 Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select
‘Go Back’ if you want to start again.
That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator.
Other settings you can make
After setting up using the Setup Navigator, you should be
ready to start enjoying your DVD recorder. It’s possible,
however, that you may want to make a couple of
additional settings, depending on how the recorder
tuned into the terrestrial TV channels.
• Manual channel setting – This setting lets you skip
channels where there is no station, as well as
manually tune to stations. See
Manual CH Setting
on
page 97.
• ShowView channel setting – This setting lets you
assign guide channels to ensure that the ShowView
®
programming system works correctly. See
ShowView
CH Setting
on page 98.
•Setting up the remote to control your TV – You can set
up the supplied remote control to control many
brands of TV. See
Setting up the remote to control your
TV
on page 109.
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Set
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup NavigatorSetup Navigator
Manual Clock Setting
2/2
Date
Time
Time Zone
Summer Time
01 01 2003
WED
00 00
Austria
Vienna
On
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Set
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control SetSetup Navigator
Setup Navigator
TV Screen Size
Wide (16:9)
Standard (4:3)
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Set
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup NavigatorSetup Navigator
AV Amp Digital Connect
Connected
Not Connected
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Set
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup NavigatorSetup Navigator
AV Amp Compatibility
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital,DTS
PCM only
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Set
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup NavigatorSetup Navigator
96kHz PCM Compatible
Compatible
Not Compatible
Don't Know
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Set
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup NavigatorSetup Navigator
Setup is complete!
Enjoy using your DVD recorder!
Finish Setup
Go Back
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 27 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Getting started
04
28
En
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for
playback and recording
The
HDD
and
DVD
buttons on the remote control and the
HDD/DVD
button on the front panel are used to select
the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for playback and recording.
The indicator in the front panel display shows which is
currently selected.
Making your first recording
This quick guide shows you how to make a basic
recording of a TV program on either the hard disk (HDD),
or to a recordable DVD.
Recording is covered in much more detail in chapter 6
(
Recording
).
1 If they aren’t already on, switch on your TV and
this recorder.
Press
STANDBY/ON
to switch on.
•Make sure that the video input on your TV is set to this
recorder.
2 Select HDD or DVD for recording.
Use the
HDD
and
DVD
buttons on the remote, or the
HDD/DVD
button on the front panel.
If you choose to record to the HDD, skip to step 5 now.
HDD DVD
DVD RECORDER
STANDBY/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD DVD
CHANNEL
REC
STOP
PLAY
STOP REC
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 28 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Getting started 04
29
En
English
3 Press
OPEN/CLOSE to eject the disc tray.
4 Load a blank DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with the
label face-up, using the disc guide to align the disc.
• When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc, the
recorder will take a moment to initialize it for
recording.
5 Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons on the remote
control or the SMART JOG on the front panel to
select the TV channel you want to record from.
• Channel presets are numbered 1–99.
•If the recorder is connected to your TV using a SCART
cable and your TV supports Direct Recording, you
can use this to very simply start recording the TV
channel you’re currently watching. See
Direct
recording from TV
on page 50 for detailed instructions.
6 Press
REC to start recording.
•By default, the recording will be in
SP
(standard play)
mode, which will give you around 2 hours of
recording from a blank DVD disc.
• You can pause recording by pressing
PAUSE
.
Press
REC
or
PAUSE
again to restart recording.
7 When you want to stop recording, press
STOP REC.
Playing back your recording
The TV program you just recorded should be on the HDD
or DVD disc as a single title with one or more chapters.
• Press
PLAY to start playback.
If you want to stop playback before the end of the
recording, press
STOP
.
Using the built-in TV tuner
Changing TV channels
When no disc is playing, you can change TV channels in
three different ways:
•
CHANNEL +/–
buttons on the remote
•
Number buttons
on the remote – For example, to
select channel 4, press
4
then
ENTER
; for channel 34,
press
3
,
4
,
ENTER
.
•
SMART JOG
on the front panel
Note
• Channel presets are numbered 1–99.
•You can’t change TV channels during playback (from
DVD or HDD) or recording, or while in recording
standby.
Changing audio channels
You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or
external input signal.
• Press AUDIO to change the audio.
The current audio channel is displayed on-screen.
•If the NICAM audio setting (see
NICAM Select
on
page 100) is set to
NICAM
and you are watching a
NICAM broadcast, you can switch between
NICAM
and
Regular
(non-NICAM) audio.
ENTER
CHANNEL
AUDIO
NICAM
Regular
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 29 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Getting started
04
30
En
• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also
select the language.
• You can also select the language for a non-NICAM
bilingual broadcast.
• When watching a recording made from an external
input with
Bilingual
recording selected (see
External
Audio
on page 100), you can switch the audio
channel between left (
L
), right (
R
) or both (
L+R
).
Note
•If the HDD is selected for recording, or a Video mode
disc is loaded, or if the recording mode is
FINE
/
MN32
, only one channel of a bilingual broadcast is
recorded. In this case, decide which language you
want to record before recording by setting the
Bilingual Recording setting (see
Bilingual Recording
on page 101).
Switching between TV and DVD
When the recorder is stopped or recording you can
choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in
TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’),
or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV
mode’).
During playback or when a menu is being displayed on-
screen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV
and is unaffected by the
TV/DVD
mode setting.
Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV
using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature.
• Press TV/DVD to switch between TV mode and
DVD mode.
Basic playback
This section shows you how to use your recorder for
playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of
video from the HDD. More playback features, such as
repeat and program play, are covered in the next chapter.
Important
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means
playback-only DVD-Video discs and DVD-R/RW. If a
function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it
is specified.
• Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This
is not a malfunction.
1 Press
STANDBY/ON to switch on.
Also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the
correct video input.
2 Select HDD or DVD for playback.
Use the
HDD
and
DVD
buttons on the remote, or the
HDD/DVD
button on the front panel.
If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 5 below.
3 Press
OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.
4 Load a disc.
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-
sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to
play face down).
NICAM A NICAM B
Regular NICAM A+B
A (L) B (R)
A + B (L+R)
LR
L+R
TV/DVD
STANDBY/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
ENTER
STOP
PLAY
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 30 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Getting started 04
31
En
English
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read
the note on page 32.
5 Press
PLAY to start playback.
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc
menu may appear when you start playback. Use the
///
(cursor) buttons and
ENTER
to navigate
DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and
ENTER
for Video CD menus.
•See the following sections for more details on playing
specific kinds of discs.
6 To stop playback, press
STOP.
7 When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject
the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.
• To open/close the disc tray, press
OPEN/CLOSE
.
Remove the disc before putting the recorder into
standby.
• Press
STANDBY/ON
to switch the recorder into
standby.,
Playing DVD discs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs.
Press to start playback.
If
RESUME
is displayed on-screen, play-
back starts from the place last stopped.
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing
PLAY
. (Press
STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed. (There are
four scan speeds; the current scan speed
is shown on-screen.)
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
Except VR mode:
During playback, enter a
chapter number then press
ENTER
to skip
directly to that chapter within the currently
playing title.
On some discs, you can also use the num-
ber buttons to select numbered items in
the disc menu.
VR mode only:
During playback, enter a
title number then press
ENTER
.
(Commercial skip) Each press skips for-
ward 30 seconds. Use to a maximum of 4
mins.
During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
Press to display the ‘top’ menu or menu of
a DVD-Video disc (these are often the
same).
Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD-
Video disc menus; press
ENTER
to select
items.
Press to return to the previous level of a
DVD-Video disc menu.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
PREV NEXT
CLEAR
CM SKIP
STEP/SLOW
TOP MENU MENU
ENTER
RETURN
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 31 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Getting started
04
32
En
Playing from the HDD
The table below shows the basic playback controls when
playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
audio CDs, and WMA/MP3 files.
Note
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the
recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amplifier
with a digital connection. Noise will be output
through the analog outputs. Also make sure that
STEREO
is selected using the
AUDIO
button (see
Switching the audio channel
on page 45).
• Scanning doesn’t work with WMA tracks.
Press to start playback.
If
RESUME
is displayed on-screen, play-
back starts from the place last stopped.
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing
PLAY
. (Press
STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed. (There are
four scan speeds; the current scan speed
is shown on-screen.)
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
During playback, enter a title number then
press
ENTER
to skip directly to that title.
(Commercial skip) Each press skips for-
ward 30 seconds. Use to a maximum of 4
mins.
During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
PREV NEXT
CLEAR
CM SKIP
STEP/SLOW
Press to start playback.
Press to stop playback.
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
CD and MP3 only:
Press to start scanning.
Press again to increase the scanning
speed. (There are two scan speeds; the
current scan speed is shown on-screen.)
Press to skip to previous/next track (or
folder for WMA/MP3 disc).
During playback, enter a track number
then press
ENTER
to skip directly to that
track.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
PREV NEXT
CLEAR
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 32 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Getting started 04
33
En
English
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
Video CD/Super VCDs.
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short)
menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you
load them and display a menu on-screen from where you
can select what to watch.
Note
•When playing in PBC mode, some playback features,
such as search, repeat and program play are not
available. You can play a PBC Video CD
/Super VCD
in
non-PBC mode by pressing
to start playback
instead of
PLAY
.
Using the Home Menu
From the Home Menu screen you can access all the
features of the recorder. Press
HOME MENU
to display
the Home Menu screen:
Use the
///
(cursor) buttons followed by
ENTER
to select the option you want. To exit the Home Menu,
press
HOME MENU
.
Press to start playback.
If
RESUME
is displayed on-screen, play-
back starts from the place last stopped.
Press to stop playback.
Video CD only:
You can resume playback
from the same point by pressing
PLAY
.
(Press
STOP
again to cancel the resume
function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed. (There are
two scan speeds; the current scan speed
is shown on-screen.)
Press to skip to previous/next track. (When
a PBC menu is displayed, press to display
the previous/next page.)
During playback, enter a track number
then press
ENTER
to skip directly to that
track.
While a PBC menu screen is displayed,
use to select numbered menu items.
Video CD only:
Each press skips forward 30
seconds. Use to a maximum of 4 mins.
Note that this function doesn’t work when
playing in PBC mode.
During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame (forward direction only).
Press to display the disc menu of a Video
CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
PREV NEXT
CLEAR
CM SKIP
STEP/SLOW
RETURN
Home menu options
Timer Recording
(page 51)
Disc Setup
(page 89)
Disc History
(page 86)
Initial Setup
(page 94)
PhotoViewer
(page 87)
Video/Audio Adjust
(page 91)
Disc Navigator
(page 37,
page 74)
Play Mode
(page 42)
Copy
(page 62)
DV Record
(page 58)
Timer Recording
Disc History
PhotoViewer
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
DV Record
HOME
MENU
ENTER
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 33 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Getting started
04
34
En
Displaying disc information on-
screen
You can display various on-screen information about the
disc loaded or the HDD.
1 Press DISPLAY repeatedly to display/change the
on-screen information.
• Press once to show the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the
status of just the currently selected playback/
recording device (HDD or removable disc).
•The on-screen display automatically disappears after
150 minutes.
2 To hide the information display, press DISPLAY
repeatedly until it disappears.
The example displays below are a guide only; actual
displays vary according to the disc loaded, etc.
HDD and removable disc activity display
Press
DISPLAY
once to see the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity.
The example displays below show high-speed copying
from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback.
Stop display 1
1DVD-RW Original / Play List
If a VR mode disc is loaded, this shows whether playback
is currently set to
Original
or
Play List
.
During preview playback of the Copy List, this shows
Copy List
.
2 Disc type and mode
Shows the disc type (
HDD
,
DVD-R
,
DVD-RW
,
CD
, etc.),
and the disc mode for recordable DVD, if applicable (
VR
or
Video
).
3 Recording mode and time
Shows the current recording mode (
FINE
,
SP
,
LP
, etc.),
and the total recording time of the disc.
4 Resume
Shows
Resume
if playback can be resumed from the last
place stopped.
5 Recording time remaining
Shows the approximate recording time left on the disc in
the current recording mode.
6 Preset name and number
Shows the preset name and preset number for the
currently selected channel.
7 Audio mode
Shows the broadcast audio mode for the current channel
preset (
Mono
,
Stereo
, etc.).
8 Copy control information
Shows recording restrictions.
9 Disc name
Shows the disc name.
(For CDs, this area shows playable files other than CD
audio tracks; for example,
Multi-format: WMA/MP3
.)
10 Finalized
Shows
Finalized
if a recordable DVD is finalized.
11 TV/DVD mode
Shows the current mode of the recorder (see
Switching
between TV and DVD
on page 30).
DISPLAY
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
Remain 10h35m
Stop
Remain 0h52mHi-Speed Copy
0h08m left
DVD-RW Video
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
Remain 10h35m
Chase Play
Rec
Remain 0h52m
Stop
DVD-RW Video
Relative playback position
Recording time
Stop
DVD-RW VR
Original
Disc Name : Comedy shows
DVD Mode
Finalized
Resume
FINE (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m Copy Once
Stereo
ABC Pr 1
1 2 87
10911
3 64 5
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 34 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Getting started 04
35
En
English
Stop display 2
1 Date and time
2 Number of titles/tracks on disc
For a VR mode DVD-RW, the number of Original and Play
List titles are shown separately.
Play display 1
1 Number of chapters in title
2 Current title and chapter number
(For CD/Video CD/Super VCD, shows current track; for
WMA/MP3, shows current folder and track; for JPEG
disc, shows current folder and file.)
3 Elapsed title time
(For CD, WMA, MP3, Super VCD, shows elapsed track
time; for Video CD, shows elapsed disc time.)
4 Total running time of title
5 Angle indicator
Lights during multi-angle scenes.
Play display 2
1 Chase playback, simultaneous record/playback,
copy, disc back-up
Indicates that recording, copying or back-up is in
progress
2 Elapsed chapter time
3 Total running time of chapter
4 Data transfer rate
Shows the current data rate being read from the disc.
5 Copy protected material (!)
Shows ‘
!
’ if the playback material is copy-once protected.
Recording display
1 Current title number
2 Elapsed recording time
3 Timer recording start and stop times
Shows the start and stop times if the current recording is
a timer recording.
4 Remaining recording time available
Shows the amount of space left on the disc in the current
recording mode.
5 Recording mode
Shows the current recording mode (
FINE
,
SP
,
LP
, etc.),
and the total recording time of the disc.
Stop
DVD-RW VR
Original
Titles
TV Mode
: Original 99
Lock Disc : On
Play List 15
14:52 SAT 15/11/2003 Copy Once
Stereo
ABC Pr 1
1 2
Play
DVD-R Video
DVD Mode
Title Total
Chapters 15
3–2 0. 00. 15
0. 11. 52
5
1 2 3 4
Play
DVD-R Video
Title Name 21/11 soccer game:
Chapter Total
Chapter Time
3–2 0. 00. 15 !
0. 00. 21
0. 01. 52
4.32Mbps
Hi-Speed Copy
5
2 3 4
1
Rec
DVD-R Video
FINE (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m
21:00 – 22:00
30. 00. 15
Copy Once
DVD Mode
Stereo
ABC Pr 1
5
1 2 3 4
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 35 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Getting started
04
36
En
Note
• When using the simultaneous play and record
feature, the display shows information for playback
only.
• During real-time copy, the copy source playback
information is displayed.
• If
Frame Search
is
On
(see
Frame Search
on
page 106), the frame number is shown next to the
elapsed time display when the disc is paused.
• Transfer rate shows the amount of video and audio
information recorded on the disc. It is not an
indication of picture/audio quality.
•The Video mode disc displays become the same as a
DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.
•The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis
is calculated based on a 12cm/4.7GB disc at the
displayed record setting.
• Recording and playback times for TV recordings are
approximately 0.1% shorter than the actual time. This
is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV
broadcasts versus DVD.
•
Copy Once
or
Can’t Record
messages may appear
in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that
the broadcast TV program contains copy control
information.
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 36 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Playback 05
37
En
English
Chapter 5
Playback
Introduction
Most of the features described in this chapter make use
of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the
///
(cursor buttons) and
ENTER
. To go back one level
from any screen, use the
RETURN
button. Remember
also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen
shows which buttons do what.
Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the
HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3
discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some
varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. The following
icons are provided to help you quickly identify which
instructions you need for which kind of disc.
Any kind of DVD, DVD-R or DVD-RW
Commercially produced DVD or finalized
Video mode DVD-R/RW
Video mode DVD-R/RW (unfinalized)
VR mode DVD-RW
HDD
Audio CD
Video CD
Super VCD
WMA or MP3 files
MP3 files
• Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This
is not a malfunction.
• When playing Video CDs, some functions, such as
making a program list, are not available in PBC
mode. Stop the disc first, then start playback by
pressing
.
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see
The
PhotoViewer
on page 87.
Using the Disc Navigator to browse
the contents of a disc.
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc
and start playback. You can use the Disc Navigator when
a disc is playing or stopped.
1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’
from the on-screen display.
Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/
MP3 disc, you can press
DISC NAVIGATOR
, which takes
you straight to the Disc Navigator screen.
2 Select what you want to play.
Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to highlight items
and
ENTER
to select.
Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc
Navigator looks slightly different.
DVD
DVD-Video
Video mode
VR mode
HDD
CD
Video CD
Super VCD
WMA/MP3
MP3
DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
DISC NAVIGATOR
HOME
MENU
HDD DVD
ENTER
Timer Recording
Disc History
PhotoViewer
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
DV Record
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 37 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Playback
05
38
En
The screen for DVD discs shows the titles on the left and
the chapters on the right. Select a title, or a chapter
within a title.
The screen for CDs and Video CDs shows a list of tracks.
The screen for WMA/MP3 discs shows a list of folders
and tracks. Select a folder or a track within a folder.
Playback starts after you press
ENTER
.
• For discs that contain both CD-Audio tracks and
WMA/MP3 tracks, you can switch the playback area
between
CD
and
WMA/MP3
. This can only be done
while the disc is stopped.
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD
When used with a recordable disc or the HDD, the Disc
Navigator gives you access to all the editing features of
this recorder as well as the ability to browse and play
titles. See also
Editing
on page 74 for more on editing
recordable discs.
1Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or
the DVD drive.
2 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’
from the on-screen display.
Alternatively, you can press
DISC NAVIGATOR
to go
straight to the Disc Navigator screen.
3 Select ‘Play’ from the menu options.
4 Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to select a
title to play.
5 Press ENTER to start playback.
Note
• It’s not possible to use the Disc Navigator when
playing a Video CD in PBC mode.
•Another way to find a particular place on a disc is to
use the time search mode. See
Search Mode
on
page 42.
Changing the thumbnail picture for a title
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears for
each title in the Disc Navigator screen using the
NAVI
MARK
button.
1 Start playback of the title you want to change
the thumbnail for.
2Press NAVI MARK anywhere in the title to make
the displayed picture the thumbnail for that title.
• For greater control over the exact frame you want to
use, you can use the
PAUSE
and/or slow-motion/
frame advance/reverse controls (
/
).
DVD
Title (1-10)
Title 01
Title 02
Title 03
Title 04
Title 05
Title 06
Title 07
Title 08
Chapter (1-003)
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
Disc Navigator
CD
Track (1-10)
Track 01
Track 02
Track 03
Track 04
Track 05
Track 06
Track 07
Track 08
Total Time 0.58.25
Disc Navigator
VR mode Video mode HDD
VR mode Video mode HDD
NAVI
MARK
ENTER
PAUSE
PLAY
STEP/SLOW
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 38 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Playback 05
39
En
English
Navigating discs and the HDD
During playback you can easily jump to another title,
chapter or track on a disc using the number buttons on
the remote, or the
SMART JOG
dial on the front panel.
1 During playback use the number buttons to
enter a chapter number within the current title.
For example, for chapter 6, press
6
; for chapter 24,
press
2
, then
4
.
• To clear and start again, press
CLEAR
.
2 Optionally: Press ENTER.
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
will jump to the new chapter.
1 During playback, use the number buttons to
input a title number.
For example, for title 6, press
6
; for title 24, press
2
,
then
4
.
• To clear and start again, press
CLEAR
.
2 Optionally: Press ENTER.
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
will jump to the new title.
1 During playback, use the number buttons to
input a track number.
For example, for track 6, press
6
; for track 24, press
2
,
then
4
.
• To clear and start again, press
CLEAR
.
2 Optionally: Press ENTER.
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
will jump to the new track.
Using the front panel controls
1 Use the FUNCTION button to select one of the
following:
•
TITLE – –
Enter a title number
•
CHP – – –
Enter a chapter number within the current
title
•
TRACK – –
Enter a track number
•
FOLDER – –
Enter a folder number
•
TRACK – – –
Enter a track number within the current
folder
2 Turn the SMART JOG dial to select a title/
chapter/folder/track number.
After you stop turning the
SMART JOG
dial, playback
jumps to the point specified after a few seconds.
ALL
ENTER
CLEAR
DVD-Video Video mode
VR mode HDD
CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
DVD HDD
CD Video CD Super VCD
WMA/MP3
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 39 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Playback
05
40
En
Scanning discs
You can fast scan discs at various speeds, forwards or
backward.
1 During playback, press
or
to start
reverse or forward scanning.
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.
2Press the same button repeatedly to increase the
scanning speed.
•
Forward: SCAN 1
SCAN 2
SCAN 3
SCAN 4
•
Reverse: Reverse play
SCAN 1
SCAN 2
SCAN 3
SCAN 4
•
SCAN 1
SCAN 2
3 To resume normal playback, press
PLAY.
Using the front panel controls
1 During playback, press FUNCTION until the
display shows ‘PLAY’.
2 Turn the SMART JOG dial to start scanning.
Turn clockwise for forward scanning; counter-clockwise
for reverse scanning.
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.
3Use the SMART JOG dial to change the scanning
speed and direction.
4 To resume normal playback, press
PLAY.
Note
•Depending on the disc, reverse playback may not be
smooth.
• Sound can be heard while scanning audio CDs
(analog output only).
• Scanning is not possible with WMA files.
•No subtitles are displayed while scanning DVD-Video
discs.
•No sound is output when scanning DVDs, except for
VR mode discs on forward
SCAN 1
*1
, for which audio
is output through the analog outputs (and digital
output if the sound is Linear PCM below 96kHz).
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD,
except on forward
SCAN 1
*1
, for which audio is
output through the analog outputs (and digital
output if the sound is Linear PCM below 96kHz).
*1
Except during chase playback and simultaneous
recording/playback.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may
automatically resume when a new chapter is reached
on a DVD disc.
REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN
DVD HDD
CD Video CD Super VCD MP3
DVD HDD
SCAN 2 SCAN 2
SCAN 3 SCAN 3
SCAN 4 SCAN 4
SCAN 1 SCAN 1
Forward play
Reverse play
ForwardReverse
CD Video CD Super VCD MP3
SCAN 2 SCAN 2
SCAN 1 SCAN 1
Play
ForwardReverse
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 40 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Playback 05
41
En
English
Playing in slow motion
You can play DVDs and Video CD/Super VCDs at various
slow motion speeds. DVDs can be played in slow motion
in either direction, while Video CD/Super VCDs can only
be played forwards in slow motion.
1 Press
or
to start slow motion reverse or
forward playback.
• The playback speed is shown on-screen.
• There is no sound during slow motion playback
2Press the same button repeatedly to change the
slow motion speed.
3 To resume normal playback, press
PLAY.
Using the front panel controls
1 During playback, press
PAUSE.
2 Press FUNCTION repeatedly until the display
shows ‘PAUSE’.
3 Turn the SMART JOG dial to start slow motion
reverse or forward playback.
Turn clockwise for forward slow motion playback;
counter-clockwise for reverse slow motion playback.
• The playback speed is shown on-screen.
• There is no sound during slow motion playback
4Use the SMART JOG dial to change the scanning
speed and direction.
5 To resume normal playback, press
PLAY.
Note
• The picture quality during slow motion playback is
not as good as during normal playback and depends
on the disc being played.
•Reverse slow-motion playback may not be as smooth
as forward and may be better with some discs than
others.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may
automatically resume when a new chapter is reached
on a DVD disc.
• No sound is output during slow-motion playback.
Frame advance/frame reverse
You can advance or back up a DVD disc frame-by-frame.
With Video CD/Super VCDs, you can only use frame
advance.
1 During playback, press
PAUSE.
2 Press
or
to back up or advance one frame.
• You can only use frame advance when playing a
Video CD.
• Hold down
or
for continuous frame reverse/
frame advance.
3 To resume normal playback, press
PLAY.
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD
PLAY
STEP/SLOW
SLOW 1/16 SLOW 1/8
SLOW 1/2 SLOW 1/4
1/8
1/4
1/2
1/16
1/8
1/4
1/2
1/16
Paused
ForwardReverse
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD
PAUSE
PLAY
STEP/SLOW
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 41 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Playback
05
42
En
Using the front panel controls
1 Press FUNCTION until the display shows ‘STEP’.
2 Turn the SMART JOG dial to advance or back up
a frame at a time.
•Turn clockwise for frame advance; counter-clockwise
for frame reverse.
• You can only use frame advance when playing a
Video CD.
3 To resume normal playback, press
PLAY.
Note
• The picture quality when using frame reverse is not
as good as frame advance.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may
automatically resume when a new chapter is reached
on a DVD disc.
The Play Mode menu
The Play Mode menu gives you access to search
functions, repeat and program play functions.
Important
• You can’t use the Play Mode features with Video CD/
Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, or while a DVD
disc menu is being displayed. For other restrictions,
see the following sections.
1Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode menu
screen.
• You can also access the Play Mode menu from the
Home Menu (press
HOME MENU
).
2 Use the
///
(cursor buttons) and ENTER
to navigate.
• To exit the Play Mode menu, press
HOME MENU
or
PLAY MODE
.
Search Mode
The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a
specified point in a disc by time or by title/chapter/folder/
track number.
1 Select ‘Search Mode’ from the Play Mode menu.
2 Select one of the search options.
3Use the number buttons to enter a title/chapter/
folder/track number or the search time (in hours,
minutes & seconds).
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search:
For example, for track 6,
press
6
. Alternatively, you can use the
/
(cursor up/
down) buttons.
Time Search (DVD and Video CD only):
For example, for 45
minutes into the disc, press
4, 5, 0, 0
. For 1 hour and 15
minutes and 20 seconds into the disc, press
1, 1, 5, 2, 0
.
• If
Frame Search
is
On
(see
Frame Search
on
page 106), then you need to add a frame number to
the end of the time search. For example 22 minutes,
10 seconds and 5 frames, press
2, 2, 1, 0, 0, 5
.
•PAL video contains 25 frames per second, numbered
0 through 24.
• When using frame search with film material
(recorded at 24 frames/second), accurate frame
search may not be possible. This is because of the
difference between the recorded frame rate and the
playback frame rate.
ALL
PLAY MODE
ENTER
CLEAR
PLAY
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
ALL
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Input Time
0.01.00
Play Mode
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 42 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Playback 05
43
En
English
4Press ENTER.
• If you searched by frame, the recorder will pause on
the selected frame.
Tip
• You can often select what you want to watch on a
DVD disc from the disc menu. Press
MENU
or
TOP
MENU
to display the disc menu.
Note
•When using time search, playback may occasionally
start slightly before or after the time you input.
• Time search doesn’t work with Super VCDs.
A-B Repeat
The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points
(A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is
played over and over.
Important
• You can’t use A-B Repeat with WMA/MP3 or Super
VCD discs.
1 During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from the
Play Mode menu.
2 Highlight ‘A (Loop Start)’.
3 At the point you want the loop to start, press
ENTER.
4 Highlight ‘B (Loop End)’.
5 At the point you want the loop to end, press
ENTER.
Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and
plays the loop round and round.
•When playing a DVD, or from the HDD, the start and
end points of the loop must be in the same title.
6To resume normal playback, select ‘Off’ from the
A-B Repeat menu.
•You can also press
CLEAR
to cancel A-B Repeat play
if no menu OSD (such as the Disc Navigator) is
displayed.
Note
• If you switch camera angles while using A-B Repeat
with a DVD-Video disc, A-B repeat is canceled.
Repeat play
There are various repeat play options, depending on the
kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for
playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together
with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the
program list (see
Program play
on the following page).
1 Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.
2 Select a repeat play mode.
•For VR mode DVD discs, select
Repeat Disc
,
Repeat
Title
or
Repeat
Chapter
(or
Repeat Off
).
• For HDD, DVD-Video and Video mode DVD discs,
select
Repeat Title
or
Repeat
Chapter
(or
Repeat
Off
).
• For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select
Repeat
Disc
or
Repeat
Track
(or
Repeat Off
).
• For WMA/MP3 discs, select
Repeat
Disc
,
Repeat
Folder
or
Repeat
Track
(or
Repeat Off
).
3 To resume normal playback, select ‘Repeat Off’
from the Repeat Play menu.
•You can also press
CLEAR
to cancel repeat play if no
menu OSD (such as the Disc Navigator) is displayed.
Note
• If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of
a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled.
•If there is a program list, you can also select
Repeat
Program
to repeat the program list.
DVD CD Video CD HDD
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
A (Loop Start)
B (Loop End)
Off
Play Mode
ALL
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
Repeat Disc
Repeat Title
Repeat Chapter
Repeat Off
Play Mode
VR mode
DVD-Video Video mode HDD
CD Video CD Super VCD
WMA/MP3
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 43 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Playback
05
44
En
Program play
This feature lets you program the play order of titles/
chapters/folders/tracks on a disc.
1 Select ‘Program’ from the Play Mode menu.
2 Select ‘Input/Edit Program’ from the list of
program options.
The Program edit screen that appears depends on the
kind of disc loaded.
On the left side is the program list, then to the right is a
list of titles (DVD), folders (WMA/MP3), or tracks (CD,
Video CD/Super VCDs). On the far right is a list of
chapters (DVD) or tracks (WMA/MP3).
3 Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the
current step in the program list.
For a DVD disc, you can add a whole title, or a chapter
within a title to the program list.
• To add a title, select the title.
• To add a chapter, first highlight the title, then press
(cursor right)and select a chapter from the list.
For a CD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a track to add to
the program list.
For a WMA/MP3 disc, you can add a whole folder, or a
track within a folder to the program list.
• To add a folder, select the folder.
•To add a track, first highlight the folder, then press
(cursor right) and select a track from the list.
After pressing
ENTER
to add the title/chapter/folder/
track, the step number automatically moves down one.
• To insert a step into the program list, highlight the
step number where you want to insert another step,
then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After
pressing
ENTER
, all the subsequent steps move
down one.
• To delete a step from the program list, highlight the
step you want to delete, then press
CLEAR
.
4 Repeat step 3 to build up a program list.
A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/
folders/tracks.
5 To play the program list, press
PLAY.
Program play remains active until you turn off program
play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject
the disc or switch off the recorder.
Tip
• To save your program list and exit the program edit
screen without starting playback, press
HOME
MENU
or
PLAY MODE
.
• You can change the program list by selecting
Input/
Edit
Program
from the Play Mode Program menu.
• During program play, press
to skip to the next
program step.
• Press
CLEAR
during playback to switch off program
play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is
displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program
list.
Other Program play functions
As well as creating and editing a program list, you can
start program play, cancel program play, and erase the
program list from the Play Mode menu.
1Press PLAY MODE and select ‘Program’ from the
list of functions on the left.
2 Select a program play function.
•
Input/Edit Program
– See above
•
Start Program Play
– Starts playback of a saved
program list
DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
Input/Edit Program
Start Program Play
Cancel Program Play
Erase Program List
Play Mode
Step
01. 01-003
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Title (1-38)
Title 01
Title 02
Title 03
Title 04
Title 05
Title 06
Title 07
Title 08
Chapter (1-004)
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
Chapter 004
Program
Step
01. 04
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Track (1-12)
Track 01
Track 02
Track 03
Track 04
Track 05
Track 06
Track 07
Track 08
Total Time 0.00.00
Program
Step
01. 01-003
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Folder (1-06)
01. ACP
02. Nth Degree
03. Pfeuti
04. Live
05. Glitch music
06. CodHead
Track (1-010)
001. Gravity deluxe
002. Tesla's patent
003. Border dispute
004. Delayed by rain
005. Accident incident
006. Pigeon post
007. Outernational
008. Vacuum tube
Program
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 44 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Playback 05
45
En
English
•
Cancel Program Play
– Turns off program play, but
does not erase the program list
•
Erase Program List
– Erases the program list and
turns off program play
Note
•When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters,
chapters not included in the program list may be
sometimes be played, depending on the disc.
• You can use repeat play with program play. Start
playback of the program list then select
Program
Repeat
from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see
Repeat play
on page 43).
Displaying and switching subtitles
Some DVD discs have subtitles in one or more
languages; the disc box will usually tell you which
subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle
language during playback.
Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle
options.
1 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle
option.
The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display.
2 To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then
CLEAR.
Note
• Some discs only allow you to change subtitle
language from the disc menu. Press
TOP MENU
to
access.
•To set subtitle preferences, see
Subtitle Language
on
page 103.
Switching DVD soundtracks
When playing a DVD disc recorded with two or more
soundtracks (often in different languages), you can
switch the soundtrack during playback.
Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack
options.
• Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio
soundtrack.
Note
• The sound may drop out for a few seconds when
switching soundtracks.
•Some discs only allow you to change audio language
from the disc menu. Press
TOP MENU
to access.
• To set audio language preferences, see
Audio
Language
on page 102.
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS
soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when
DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack,
connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV
amplifier with built-in DTS decoder via the digital
output. See
Connecting to an AV amplifier
on page 19
for connection details.
Switching the audio channel
For VR mode content recorded with bilingual audio, you
can switch between left (
L
) channel, right (
R
) channel, or
both (
L+R
).
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch
between stereo, just the left channel or just the right
channel.
Some Super VCD discs have two soundtracks. With
these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks
as well as individual channels in each.
DVD-Video
Subtitle: 1/2 English
The toucan lives in tropical forests
DVD-Video
Audio : 1/2 Dolby Digital 2/0CH
VR mode CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 45 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Playback
05
46
En
1 To display/switch the audio channel, press
AUDIO repeatedly.
The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-
screen.
•
L+R
– Both channels (default)
•
L
– Left channel only
•
R
– Right channel only
•
Stereo
– Stereo (default)
•
1/L
– Left channel only
•
2/R
– Right channel only
•
1 Stereo
– Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default)
•
1 L
– Soundtrack 1 / Left channel
•
1 R
– Soundtrack 1 / Right channel
•
2 Stereo
– Soundtrack 2 / Stereo
•
2 L
– Soundtrack 2 / Left channel
•
2 R
– Soundtrack 2 / Right channel
Note
• When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode
disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital
soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch
the audio channel. Set
Dolby Digital Out
to
Dolby
Digital
PCM
(see
Dolby Digital Out
on page 101)
or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch
the audio channel.
Switching camera angles
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or
more angles—check the disc box for details: it should be
marked with a icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon
appears on screen to let you know that other angles are
available (this can be switched off if you prefer—see
Angle Indicator
on page 108).
• To switch the camera angle, press ANGLE.
• The angle number is displayed on-screen.
•If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the
new angle.
•Repeat play is canceled if you change the angle while
repeat playback is active.
Note
•You can also change the angle from some DVD-Video
disc menus. Press
TOP MENU
to access.
VR mode
CD Video CD WMA/MP3
Super VCD
DVD-Video
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 46 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Recording 06
47
En
English
Chapter 6
Recording
About DVD recording
This recorder can record on both DVD-R and DVD-RW
media. The main difference between the two is that DVD-
R discs can only be recorded once, while DVD-RW can be
recorded, erased and re-recorded many times.
A further difference between the two disc types is that
only DVD-RW can be initialized for
VR mode
recording,
which offers much more comprehensive editing
functions compared to
Video mode
recording.
The big advantage, however, of Video mode is its
compatibility with standard DVD players, most of which
will not play VR mode DVD-RW discs (see also the notes
below).
While DVD-R discs can only be recorded using the Video
mode, you can initialize a DVD-RW disc for Video or VR
mode recordings. Once initialized (any previous content
is erased in this operation), all recordings on that disc
will be in the chosen recording mode.
Important
•You cannot play, edit or record on unfinalized DVD-R/
RW discs recorded in Video mode on other DVD
recorders. (Likewise, unfinalized Video mode discs
recorded on this recorder are not playable on other
players/recorders.)
• This recorder cannot record onto CD-R or CD-RW
discs.
• Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure
due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the
recorder.
•Fingerprints and small scratches on a disc can affect
playback and/or recording performance. Please take
proper care of your discs.
•Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM,
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also
Input Line System
on page 95.
Note
• Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models,
are compatible with VR mode DVD-RW discs. Check
the operating instructions for your player for VR
mode compatibility information.
•The maximum number of titles that can be recorded
on a DVD-R/RW disc is 99.
About HDD recording
Recording to the internal hard disk drive (HDD) is
basically similar to recording to a VR mode DVD-RW disc.
You have the full choice of recording quality options,
including the manual mode, and of course you can
record, erase and re-record as many times as you like.
The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can
store many hours of video on it, even in the higher quality
recording modes. To help you organize the contents, the
HDD is divided into four groups. You can name and use
these groups as you like—for example, you might have a
group for movies, another for TV shows, and one for
camcorder recordings.
Important
• It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on
the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure
that the Input Line System setting (page 95) matches
the TV line system of the source you’re recording.
Note
•The maximum number of titles that can be recorded
on the HDD is 99.
Recording time and picture quality
There are four preset recording quality modes:
•
FINE
– Highest quality setting, gives about 1 hour of
recording time on a DVD disc.
•
SP
(Standard Play) – Default quality, sufficient for
most applications, gives about 2 hours of recording
time on a DVD.
•
LP
(Long Play) – Slightly lower video quality, but
doubles the recording time on a DVD to around 4
hours.
•
EP
(Extended Play) – Use when maximum recording
time is most important; EP gives you around 6 hours
of recording time on a DVD disc.
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 47 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Recording
06
48
En
In addition to these settings, you can access 32 different
recording quality/time settings when manual recording
mode is on (see
Manual Recording
on page 104), giving
you very fine control over the recording.
Note that all recording times (both here and those shown
by the recorder) are only approximate. This is because of
the way that the video is recorded; you may get slightly
more or slightly less, depending on what you’re
recording.
In all except the
FINE
/
MN32
modes, sound is recorded in
two channel Dolby Digital format. When set to
FINE
/
MN32
, sound is recorded in high quality, uncompressed
Linear PCM format.
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording
in Video mode or to the HDD, or in VR mode on the
FINE
/
MN32
setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting
(page 101) to select the
A/L
or
B/R
audio channel to
record before recording starts.
Restrictions on video recording
• You cannot record copy-protected video using this
recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video
discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-
protected material is encountered during a
recording, recording will pause automatically and an
error message will be displayed on-screen.
•Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded on
the HDD or a DVD-RW disc in VR mode (see below).
• When recording a TV broadcast or through an
external input, you can display copy control
information on screen. (see
Displaying disc
information on-screen
on page 34).
CPRM
CPRM is a copy protection system with scramble system
regarding the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast
programs. CPRM stands for
Content Protection for
Recordable Media
.
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that
you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you
cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM
recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVD-
RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode or on
the HDD.
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that
are specifically compatible with CPRM.
Recording equipment and copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
• This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of
certain U. S. patents and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision
Corporation, and is intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 48 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Recording 06
49
En
English
Setting the picture quality/recording
time
Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set
the picture quality/recording time. There are four
standard settings available, which allow you to choose a
balance between picture quality and recording time.
It’s also possible to create a fifth, ‘manual’ setting for
picture quality/recording time. Before you can select this,
however, you will need to set the
Manual Recording
option in the Initial Settings menu (see
Manual Recording
on page 104).
•Press REC MODE repeatedly to select a recording
setting.
You can also use the front panel controls: Press
FUNCTION
repeatedly until the display shows ‘
REC
MODE
’, then use the
SMART JOG
dial to select the
recording mode.
•
FINE
– Fine picture quality
•
SP
– Standard play
•
LP
– Long play
•
EP
– Extended play
•
MN
– Manual (available only when manual recording
is on)
The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and
shown on-screen together with the recording time for a
blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the
approximate remaining recording time for that disc is
also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting
(see
On Screen Display
on page 95) is
Off
then this
information is not displayed.)
Basic recording from the TV
Follow the instructions below to record a TV program.
Recording starts immediately and continues until the
disc is full or you stop the recording.
1Press HDD or DVD to record to the hard disk drive
or a recordable DVD respectively.
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if
you load a new blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder
takes a short while to initialize the disc).
2 Use the REC MODE button to set the picture
quality/recording time.
• See
Setting the picture quality/recording time
above
for detailed instructions.
3 Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to select the TV
channel to record.
The front panel display shows the channel number:
VR mode Video mode HDD
REC MODE
VR mode Video mode HDD
DVD RECORDER
AUDIO
HDD DVD
ENTER
CHANNEL
REC
PAUSE
STOP REC
REC MODE
23 30 7
Channel preset
PR
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 49 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Recording
06
50
En
• While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the
number buttons on the remote to select the channel.
(For channel 6, press
6
then
ENTER
; for channel 24,
press
2, 4
then
ENTER
)
• You can also use the front panel controls: Press
FUNCTION
repeatedly until the display shows
‘
CHANNEL
’ then use the
SMART JOG
dial to select
the channel number.
4 Use the AUDIO button to select the audio
channel to record.
See
Changing audio channels
on page 29 for more on
this.
• When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is
bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing
you to switch the audio channel on playback. The
only exception to this is when the picture quality is set
to
FINE
/
MN32
, in which case you do need to select
the audio channel before recording.
5 Press
REC to start recording.
If you want to set a recording time, press the
REC
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
minute increments, up to a maximum of 6 hours. You can
see the recording time on-screen and in the front panel
display. When the recording ends, the recorder
automatically switches into standby if no other operation
is being performed.
• To cancel the set recording time, press
REC
.
• If you want to pause recording at any time, press
PAUSE
. Press again to restart the recording. (If
recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter
is started after recording restarts)
6 To stop the recording, press
STOP REC.
•If you set the recording time in the previous step, you
can still stop the recording anytime by pressing
STOP REC
.
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 6 hours of
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).
Tip
•During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop
through function. During recording, press
FUNCTION
(front panel only) until the display shows
SCART
, then use the
SMART JOG
dial to select
SCART THRU
(loop through on) or
SCART NORM
(loop through off). Note that you can’t switch loop
through on if recording from the
AV2/(INPUT 1/
DECODER)
or
AV1(RGB)-TV
connectors. Also, loop
through is automatically reset to off after recording
has finished.
Direct recording from TV
If you connected this recorder to your TV using a SCART
cable, and your TV supports direct recording, you can
record whatever is currently being shown on the TV
without having to worry about what channel preset the
recorder is on. Check the instructions that came with
your TV if you’re not sure whether your TV supports this
feature.
1 If necessary, load a recordable disc.
2 Set the picture quality/recording time using the
REC MODE button.
3 Press TV DIRECT REC to start recording.
If you want to set a recording time, press the
REC
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
minute increments, up to a maximum of 6 hours. You can
see the recording time on-screen and in the front panel
display. When the recording ends, the recorder
automatically switches into standby if no other operation
is being performed.
• To cancel the set recording time, press
REC
.
• If you want to pause recording at any time, press
PAUSE
. Press again to restart the recording. (If
recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter
is started after recording restarts)
4 To stop the recording, press
STOP REC.
• If you set the recording time in step
3
, you can still
stop the recording anytime by pressing
STOP REC
.
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 6 hours of
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).
TV DIRECT
REC
REC
PAUSE
STOP REC
REC MODE
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 50 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Recording 06
51
En
English
Setting a timer recording
Using the timer recording features you can program up
to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer
recording programs can be set to record just once, every
day, or every week.
You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable
DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly)
HDD timer recordings that you don’t want to keep, you
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to
automatically replace the previous timer recording with
the new one.
You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc
(see
Optimized Rec
on page 104 for more on this).
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the
recording, the Recovery Recording feature will
automatically record the program to the HDD for you.
This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video
Programming System) and PDC (Program Delivery
Control) systems used by many TV stations to ensure that
a timer recording catches the whole program even when
the program is not running to schedule. Up to eight timer
programs can be set with VPS/PDC on.
Important
• Timer recording can’t be used if:
– There is another timer recording in progress, or the
recorder is in timer record standby.
– Auto Start Recording is in progress.
– There are already 32 timer programs waiting to be
recorded.
• Timer recording will not start if:
– The recorder is already recording
– The timer programming screen is displayed on-
screen
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized.
• Except for finalized Video mode discs, timer
recording will start when the operation preventing
timer recording has finished.
• The timer indicator lights in the front panel display
when the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it
means that (for a DVD timer recording) there is no
disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable (for
an HDD timer recording it means that the HDD is not
recordable).
• Timer recordings have higher priority than the Auto
Start Recording function (see
Automatic recording
from a satellite tuner
on page 57). A timer recording
will interrupt an Auto Start Recording. (Auto Start
Recording will resume after the timer recording has
finished.)
•Approximately two minutes before a timer recording
is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording
standby (assuming that a recordable disc is loaded,
for a DVD timer recording). In timer recording
standby you cannot use some functions.
•VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in
your country/area. Check with the stations for
compatibility.
Easy timer recording
As the name suggests, easy timer recording makes
setting up a timer recording as simple as possible.
VR mode Video mode HDD
DVD RECORDER
RETURN
HOME
MENU
EASY
TIMER
HDD DVD
ENTER
CHANNEL
REC MODE
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 51 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Recording
06
52
En
1Press EASY TIMER.
Alternatively, you can also access from the Home Menu
(press
HOME MENU
and select
Timer Recording
then
Easy Timer Recording
).
2 Set the TV channel and recording quality.
•Use the
CHANNEL +/–
buttons to set the channel you
want to record.
• Use the
REC MODE
button to set the recording
quality. Press repeatedly to switch between
FINE
,
SP
,
LP
and
EP
(and
MN
if manual recording mode is on).
• Press
DVD
to record to DVD disc, or
HDD
if you want
to record to the hard disk drive.
3 Use
///
(cursor buttons) to move the
cursor to the recording start date and time on the
grid.
• You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at
a time using the
and
buttons.
Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer
recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is
a 15 minute interval.
The darker area represents time that has already passed
and can’t therefore be selected. The lighter area is time
that’s available.
4 Press ENTER to set the start time.
The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the
screen.
• You can go back and reset the start time if you need
to by pressing
RETURN
.
5 Use the
/
(cursor left/right) to move the
cursor to the recording end time on the grid.
As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow
stretches from the start time to the current cursor
position, representing the length of the recording. A
recording of up to 6 hours can be set.
6 Press ENTER to set the end time and exit the
timer recording screen.
• You can check the timer program you just set from
the main timer recording screen (see
Standard timer
recording
on page 52).
Note
• You can’t use VPS/PDC with easy timer recordings.
Use the standard or ShowView timer recording
methods if you want to use VPS/PDC.
Standard timer recording
The timer recording screen you can see all the timer
programs already set, clear programs and set up new
ones.
1 Press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording
screen.
You can also access the Timer Recording screen from
the Home Menu (press
HOME MENU
, select
Timer
Recording
, then
Timer Recording (View)
).
8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00
13/12
14/12
15/12
Easy Timer Recording
FINEPr 7
13/12
WED
--:--
9:30
HDD
CHANNEL +/–
REC MODE HDD/DVD
Easy Timer Recording
8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00
13/12
14/12
15/12
11:45
FINEPr 7
13/12
WED
HDD
- -:- -
Current time
Recording start time
CHANNEL +/–
REC MODE HDD/DVD
13/12
14/12
15/12
Easy Timer Recording
FINEPr 7
HDD
11:45 13:45
13/12
WED
Recording start time
Recording end time
11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00
CHANNEL +/–
REC MODE HDD/DVD
HOME
MENU
ENTER
CLEAR
PREV NEXT
TIMER REC
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 52 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Recording 06
53
En
English
This screen shows all the timer programs currently set.
• The amount of free space available on the HDD and
the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown
towards the bottom of the screen.
• In the lower-right corner, the number of timer
programs already set and the number that use VPS/
PDC, is shown next to
Tmr Pgms
.
•Each row is for one timer recording program, with the
date and time information, frequency, channel,
recording mode, DVD or HDD and the VPS/PDC
setting.
• If there are more than eight timer programs already
set, press
NEXT
to switch page (go back using
the
PREV
button).
•You can also clear a timer program by highlighting it
and pressing
CLEAR
.
2 Select ‘New Input’ to set a new timer program,
then press ENTER.
3 Enter the timer recording settings.
Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select a field;
use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to change the
value.
•
Date
– Choose a date up to one month in advance, or
select a daily or weekly program.
•
Start
– Set the recording start time.
•
Stop
– Set the recording end time (maximum length
of a timer recording is 6 hours).
•
CH
– Choose a channel (1–99, excluding skip
channels), or one of the external inputs from which to
record.
•
Mode
– Select
FINE
,
SP
,
LP
or
EP
(See
Setting the
picture quality/recording time
on page 49). If Manual
Recording is on, then you can also select the
MN
setting.
•
Rec to
– Select
HDD
for hard disk recording or
DVD
for DVD recording. Select
HDD
for Auto Replace
Recording (daily or weekly timer recording only).
•
Group
– Select a record group (for HDD recording
only).
•
VPS/PDC
– The VPS/PDC system automatically
adjusts the recording time so that even if a program
is not running to schedule you won’t miss it. For VPS/
PDC to work properly, you must input the correct
announced time and date of the program you want to
record. Up to eight timer recordings can be set with
VPS/PDC on.
Note that VPS/PDC may not work with every station
and that Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/
PDC is on.
•
Recorded Title Name
– Optionally, you can enter a
name for the recording up to 32 characters.
4 After entering all the timer recording
information, press ENTER.
The main timer recording screen is displayed again. The
timer program you just input appears in the list.
• If
Optimized Rec
(see
Optimized Rec
on page 104) is
set to
On
(and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will
adjust the recording quality to try and fit the
recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto
the disc even on MN1 recording quality then the
Recovery Recording feature will automatically make
the recording to the HDD instead.
5 To exit the timer recording screen, press HOME
MENU.
Note
•When Optimized Rec is On, Optimized Recording
takes priority over Recovery Recording when
recording to DVD. In other words, if there’s not
enough space on the DVD disc for the recording to
complete on the recording quality set, the recorder
will first try and adjust the recording quality. If the
recorder can’t compensate using a lower recording
mode setting, then the HDD is used for Recovery
Recording.
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an
Auto Replace Recording may not complete
successfully.
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed
copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to
start, the new timer recording will not replace the old
one. However, the next time the timer recording
starts, both of the older two programs will be erased.
WED
13/12
7:00 8:00 Pr 3 FINE
HDD
Off
THU
14/12
9
:00 10:00 Pr 5 FINE
HDD
On
New Input
Date Start Stop CH
Mode
Rec to VPS/PDC
1/1
Timer Recording
HDD Remain
10h20m(FINE)
DVD Remain
0h43m(FINE)
OFF
VPS/PDC
Recorded Title Name
Date Start Stop CH
Rec Mode
Input
TUE
12/12
10 00 11 00 Pr 7
FINE
Timer Recording
Rec to
Group
HDD
GROUP1
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 53 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Recording
06
54
En
• If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you
must switch the recorder into standby before the
timer recording is due to start for it to work correctly.
For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need
to switch the recorder into standby.
Tip
• Stations that use VPS/PDC typically include VPS/
PDC information in the teletext TV guide pages.
Please refer to these when setting your timer
recording.
Timer recording using the ShowView
programming system
This system makes programming timer recordings very
simple. Most TV guides publish ShowView programming
numbers with their program details. If you want to make
a timer recording of a program, you just input the
corresponding code. The date, start, stop and channel
settings are made automatically. All you have to do is tell
the recorder the recording mode, and whether it’s a
once-only recording or a regular recording.
1 Press S
HOW
V
IEW
to display the ShowView
program screen.
You can also access this screen from the Home Menu
(press
HOME MENU
, select
Timer Recording
, then
ShowView
).
• Use the number buttons to enter the ShowView
programming number. (To clear the last digit
entered, press
CLEAR
.)
• Press
REC MODE
to change the recording quality
(see also
Setting the picture quality/recording time
on
page 49). If Manual Recording is on, then you can
also select the
MN
setting.
•Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select the
Once
,
Daily
or
Weekly
recording option.
• Press
HDD
to record to the hard disk drive, or
DVD
to
record to a DVD.
•Use the
and
buttons to switch VPS/PDC
On
or
Off
.
2 After making the settings, press ENTER.
The program details are shown at the bottom of the
screen for a few seconds then the screen is automatically
exited.
• If you haven’t set up the guide channels (or at least
the guide channel for the ShowView programming
number that you entered), the recorder will prompt
you to enter the channel number that the TV program
is showing on.
Tip
• You can check the timer program settings by
pressing
TIMER REC
to display the timer recording
screen.
HOME
MENU
HDD DVD
ENTER
CLEAR
REC MODE
to input
3 9 9 2 4 09
ShowView#
Rec Mode
Rec Times
ShowView
MN21
Once Daily
Weekly
REC MODE
to change
to change level
to change
VPS/PDC Off
to change
HDD DVD
Rec to HDD
to change
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 54 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Recording 06
55
En
English
ShowView programming with the power off
You can enter a ShowView programming number when
the recorder is in standby. Note that the recording is
always made to the HDD. If you want to record to a DVD
disc, you’ll need to switch on the power and use the full
ShowView program screen.
Important
• You can’t use this feature until you have set up the
guide channels. See
ShowView CH Setting
on page 98
• You can’t change the recording mode.
• You can’t program daily or weekly timer recordings.
1 Press S
HOW
V
IEW
.
The front panel display shows the current recording
mode and prompts you to enter the ShowView
programming number.
2Use the number buttons to enter the ShowView
programming number.
• To clear the last digit entered, press
CLEAR
.
•Use the
PREV
/
NEXT
button to switch VPS/
PDC on/off. With VPS/PDC on, the front panel VPS/
PDC indicator lights. (Note that a maximum of 8
timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC on.)
3Press ENTER.
The display shows the timer settings:
Date
Start time
End time
Recording medium
(DVD or HDD) and Recording channel.
• If
CODE ERROR
appears in the display, check that
the ShowView programming number is correct and
start again from step
1
.
• If
CAN’T SET
appears in the display, it means that
although you entered a valid ShowView
programming number, the program has already
finished.
Stopping or extending a timer recording in
progress
After a timer recording has started, you can cancel or
extend recording.
1 Press and hold
REC for 3 seconds.
Only the program is canceled (the timer indicator
disappears); recording continues.
2 If you want to stop recording completely, press
STOP REC.
• To extend recording, press
REC
repeatedly to
extend recording in 30 minute increments.
Preventing use of the recorder before a
timer recording (child lock)
You can make all the front panel and remote control
buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is
useful when you set a timer recording and want to make
sure that the timer settings are not changed before
recording has finished.
1 If the recorder is on, switch it into standby.
2 Press and hold
STOP on the front panel for 3
seconds to lock the controls.
The front panel display briefly shows
LOCK
. If any buttons
are pressed on the remote or front panel,
LOCK
is briefly
displayed again.
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold
STOP
on
the front panel for 3 seconds until the display shows
UNLOCK
.
• To cancel a timer recording when the recorder is
locked, first unlock the recorder (see above), then
press and hold
REC
for 3 seconds.
ENTER
CLEAR
PREV NEXT
SHOWVIEW
29324
REC STOP REC
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 55 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Recording
06
56
En
Timer recording FAQ
Frequently Asked Questions
•Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start
recording!
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not
locked (see
Lock Disc
on page 89), and that there are
fewer than 99 titles already on the DVD/HDD.
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer program! Why
not?
You can’t enter a timer program while a timer
recording is in progress, during timer recording
standby or when the clock isn’t set.
• What happens when two or more timer programs
overlap?
Basically, the program with the earlier recording start
time has priority. However, the recorder will start
recording the program with the later start time after
the earlier program is finished. If two programs have
the same times (but different channels, for example),
the program set most recently takes priority.
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are
programmed to start at the same time, then the
program that actually starts first takes priority.
Simultaneous recording and
playback
A feature called Chase Play makes it possible to watch a
recording in progress (DVD or HDD) from the start of the
recording (as in, playback is ‘chasing’ the recording). For
example, perhaps you have to miss the first 30 minutes of
a movie on TV; you can start recording, then start
watching the movie, from the beginning, while the
recorder is still recording 30 minutes ahead of you.
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording
in progress; you can watch anything else already on the
DVD or HDD by selecting it from the Disc Navigator
screen (see
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD
on page 38).
Important
•Note that you must use a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1/2x disc to
be able to use this feature.
• Unrecorded DVD-RW discs initialized on another
recorder may not be able to use this feature.
•During recording, press
PLAY to start playback
from the beginning of the current recording, or press
DISC NAVIGATOR and select another title to play
from there.
You can use all the usual playback controls, such as
pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip.
• To stop playback, press
STOP
(recording will
continue).
• To stop recording, press
STOP REC
(playback will
continue).
Note
•You can’t start playback immediately after recording
starts.
•When scanning a DVD, no sound is output if the
recorder is also recording the DVD (see
Scanning
discs
on page 40).
• You can’t use this feature during Auto Start
Recording, or in Auto Start Recording standby.
• You can’t use simultaneous playback and recording
while copying or backing up.
• During recording or in timer recording standby, you
can’t play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD
disc if the Input Line System setting doesn’t match
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also
Input Line System
on page 95). Also, during
simultaneous recording and playback, if the TV line
system of the playback track/title changes then
playback will automatically stop.
VR mode HDD
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 56 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Recording 06
57
En
English
Recording from an external
component
You can record from an external component, such as a
camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s
external inputs.
1 Make sure that the component you want to
record from is connected properly to the DVD
recorder.
See Chapter 2 (
Connecting up
) for connection options.
2 Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select one of
the external inputs to record from.
There are three analog inputs and a DV digital input. The
current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel
display:
•
AV2/L1
– Input 1
•
L2
– Input 2 (front panel)
•
L3
– Input 3/Auto Start Rec
•
DV
– DV input/output (front panel)
Check that the
Audio In
settings for
External Audio
,
Bilingual Recording
and
DV Input
are as you want them
(see
Audio In settings
on page 100).
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or
stretched), adjust on the source component or your
TV before recording.
3 Set up the recorder.
• Use
REC MODE
to set the recording quality. See
Setting the picture quality/recording time
on page 49
for detailed information.
• Press
HDD
to record to the hard disk drive, or
DVD
to
record to a DVD.
4 Press
REC when you’re ready to start
recording.
•The recorder will only start recording from the
DV IN/
OUT
jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will also
pause if the signal is interrupted during recording.
Note
• If your source is copy-protected using CopyGuard,
you will not be able to record it. See
Restrictions on
video recording
on page 48 for more details.
Automatic recording from a satellite
tuner
If you have a satellite tuner or some other kind of set top
box connected to the
L3
input, you can have the recorder
start and stop recording automatically with the timer
settings of the connected component. (If the other
component doesn’t have a built-in timer, you’ll need to
use it with an external timer unit.)
After setting up for Auto Start Recording, this recorder
starts recording when it detects a signal from the other
component. When the signal ceases, the recorder stops
recording.
Important
•It takes a little while for this recorder to switch on and
start recording after detecting a signal. Please bear
this in mind when setting the timer.
1 Set the timer for the satellite receiver (or other
component), then switch it into standby (if
necessary).
Check the manual that came with the receiver if you’re
not sure how to do this.
2 Check that the ‘Audio In’ settings for ‘External
Audio’ and ‘Bilingual Recording’ are as you want
them.
See
Audio In settings
on page 100 for more on these
settings.
VR mode Video mode HDD
INPUT
SELECT
HDD DVD
ENTER
CLEAR
REC
REC MODE
HDD
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 57 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Recording
06
58
En
3 Set up the recorder.
• Use
REC MODE
to set the recording quality. See
Setting the picture quality/recording time
on page 49
for detailed information.
4Press and hold the FUNCTION button on the front
panel for 3 seconds.
The recorder goes into standby and the
AUTO
indicator
in the front panel display lights.
The recorder will automatically switch on and start
recording when the other component comes on.
Recording stops when the external component switches
off.
• To cancel Auto Start Recording, press
STANDBY/
ON
. The indicator goes off.
• To cancel Auto Start Recording once recording has
already started, press
REC
for 3 seconds, then
STOP REC
.
Note
•Recording directly to DVD is not possible when using
this feature.
• You can’t set Auto Start Recording when:
• the recorder is recording or in timer recording
standby.
• the HDD is not recordable.
• the HDD already contains the maximum number
of titles (99).
• If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not start if
another timer recording is in progress.
• Timer recordings take precedence over Auto Start
Recording. Auto Start Recording will stop if a timer
recording is due to start. After the timer recording
has finished, Auto Start Recording will resume.
Recording from a DV camcorder
You can record from a DV camcorder connected to the
DV IN/OUT
jack on the front panel of this recorder. Using
the recorder’s remote, you can control both the
camcorder and this recorder.
Before recording, make sure that the audio input for the
DV IN/OUT
jack is setup (see
DV Input
on page 101).
Important
• The source signal must be DVC-SD format
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this
recorder’s remote.
• If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable,
you cannot control the second unit from this one.
• You can’t control this unit remotely from a
component connected to the
DV IN/OUT
jack.
• You can’t record date and time information from DV
cassette.
• You can’t record copy-protected or copy-once
material.
•During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or
has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will
pause recording. Recording will restart automatically
when there is a recordable signal.
• For best results when recording from a DV
camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing
the camcorder to the place you want to start
recording from and setting the camcorder to play-
pause.
1Make sure your digital camcorder is connected to
the front panel DV IN/OUT jack.
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
VR mode Video mode HDD
RETURN
HOME
MENU
HDD DVD
ENTER
CLEAR
PAUSE STOP
REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN
STEP/SLOW
REC MODE
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 58 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Recording 06
59
En
English
2 Set up the recorder.
• Use
REC MODE
to set the recording quality. See
Setting the picture quality/recording time
on page 49
for detailed information.
• Make sure a recordable disc is loaded if you want to
record to DVD.
3From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV
audio input is setup as you require.
See
DV Input
on page 101 for more on this.
• Check also that the
Audio In
settings for
External
Audio
and
Bilingual Recording
are as you want
them (see
Audio In settings
on page 100).
4 Press HOME MENU and select ‘DV Record’ from
the menu.
•DV recording only works when the digital camcorder
is in VTR mode with a tape loaded.
5 Select ‘Record to HDD’ or ‘Record to DVD’ to
record to the hard disk drive or a recordable DVD
respectively.
6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you
want to start recording from.
For best results, pause playback at the point from which
you want to record.
• Depending on your camcorder, you can use this
recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the
,
,
,
,
,
and
buttons.
7Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to select
‘Start Rec’ and press ENTER.
• Recording is automatically paused if the recorder
detects no signal, or a copy-protected signal.
Recording restarts when there is a non-copy-
protected signal.
• You can pause or stop the recording by selecting
Pause Rec
or
Stop Rec
from the on-screen display.
You cannot control the camcorder from this remote
control during recording.
•If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder,
the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not
be recorded. Use the pause button on your
camcorder instead and recording will start
immediately.
•
HDD and DVD-RW (VR Mode) only:
A chapter marker
is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode
on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is
stopped or paused then restarted, for example.
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording
screen using the
HOME MENU
or
RETURN
button.
Note
• Depending on the connected camcorder, you may
not be able to control it using the remote control
supplied with this recorder.
• If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read
correctly, the audio type will not switch
automatically. You can switch the audio manually
from the
External Audio
setting (page 100).
• See also
DV-related messages
on page 114 if you
encounter an error while using the
DV IN/OUT
jack.
Frequently Asked Questions
•I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder!
Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also
make sure that what you’re trying to record is not
copy-protected.
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder
then switch back on.
• There’s a picture, but no sound!
Try switching the
DV Input
setting (see
DV Input
on
page 101) between
Stereo 1
and
Stereo 2
.
Recording from the DV output
You can record non-copy-protected material from the
hard disk drive or from a DVD to a camcorder connected
to the
DV IN/OUT
jack.
1Connect the camcorder to the DV IN/OUT jack of
this recorder.
2 Select the HDD or DVD for playback.
3 Find the place you want to start recording from.
4 Start recording on the camcorder.
5 Play the source material.
HDD
SP (2h00m/DVD)
1h40m
Remain
Stop
1.02.22
Stop
Control with these
buttons Start Rec
Pause Rec
Stop Rec
VR mode Video mode HDD
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 59 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Recording
06
60
En
Playing your recordings on other DVD
players
Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs
recorded in Video mode. A number of players (including
many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs
recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Check the manual
that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it
will play.
When you finalize a Video mode disc, a title menu is
created from which you can select titles when you play
the disc. There are a number of different styles of title
menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc.
All the title menus are navigated in the usual way,
pressing
MENU
or
TOP MENU
to display the menu, then
using the
///
(cursor buttons) followed by
ENTER
to select titles and start playback.
Finalizing a disc
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after
you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you
want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see
Input Disc
Name
on page 89 before starting the steps below.
Important
•Once you’ve finalized a disc recorded in Video mode,
you can’t edit or record anything else on that disc.
However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe
‘undone’; see
Undo Finalize
on page 90 for how to do
this.
•A VR mode disc can still be recorded and edited on
this recorder even after finalizing.
1 Load the disc you want to finalize.
Make sure that the recorder is stopped before
proceeding.
2 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
3 Select ‘Finalize’.
4 Select ‘Finalize’ from the finalize options, then
‘Next Screen’.
The recorder starts finalizing the disc.
• If the finalization process is going to take more than
around 4 minutes, you can press
ENTER
to cancel.
Around 4 minutes before completion, the option to
cancel disappears.
• How long finalization takes depends on the type of
disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the
number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR
mode can take up to 1 hour to finalize. A disc
recorded in Video mode can take up to 20 minutes.
5 For Video mode discs only, select a title menu
style.
The menu you select will be the one that appears when
the ‘top menu’ is selected on any DVD player.
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer
DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature.
These discs will have only a text title menu when
finalized on this recorder.
Note
• If the TV line system of the disc is different to the
current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to
finalize the disc. See
Input Line System
on page 95 for
how to change the recorder’s setting.
VR mode Video mode
VR mode Video mode
Finalize
Undo Finalize
Next Screen
Start
Disc Setup
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
T
I
T
L
E
M
E
N
U
TITLE MENU
Finalize
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 60 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Recording 06
61
En
English
Initializing a DVD-RW disc
When you first load a blank disc, the recorder will
initialize it automatically for recording. You can also
manually initialize DVD-RW discs.
You can initialize a disc for either Video mode recording
or VR mode recording.
Important
•Initializing a disc will erase everything recorded on it.
Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want
to keep!
•You may not be able to re-initialize a disc in a different
format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD
recorder.
1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
2 Select ‘Initialize’
3 Select ‘Video Mode’ or ‘VR Mode’ from the
initialize options.
4 Select ‘Start’.
It takes about 40 seconds to initialize the disc.
Note
• By default, the recorder initializes blank DVD-RW
discs for VR mode recording. See
DVD-RW Auto Init.
on page 105 if you want to change the default to
Video mode.
• If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD
recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or
initialize it for Video mode recording.
DVD-RW
VR Mode
Video Mode
Start
Start
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Disc Setup
Initializing Disc
1 min left
Pr 1
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 61 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Copying and back-up
07
62
En
Chapter 7
Copying and back-up
Introduction
Use the copying features of this recorder to:
• Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to
a DVD
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play
in another player.
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD.
The simplest method of copying is to use the One Touch
Copy feature. Using this you can very simply copy the title
that’s currently playing from HDD to DVD, or the other
way around.
For more complicated copying tasks you can make a
Copy List which specifies very precisely what needs to be
copied. A Copy List is very similar to a VR mode Play List
in many ways, and you’ll find that the Copy List
commands are very similar to those available for editing
a Play List.
High-speed copying
Copying between DVD and HDD is a completely digital
process and therefore involves no loss of quality in the
audio or video. This means that you can transfer back
and forth without having to worry about the quality
getting worse with each copy ‘generation’. It also means
that copying can be carried out at the maximum speed
possible.
When copying from HDD to DVD, the speed of copying
depends on the recording mode and the kind of DVD disc
you’re using. The table below shows the minimum
copying time for one hour of material:
*1
Compatible with single speed recording only
*2
Compatible with 2x speed recording
*3
Compatible with 4x speed recording
Note
•Not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying.
Check with the disc manufacturer for compatibility.
• There may be cases where even 2x/4x compatible
discs do not copy at full speed.
•Discs initialized on another recorder are not
compatible with high-speed copying.
Real-time copying
Real-time copying is also possible, with the advantage
that you can use a different recording mode from the
original. For example, you can record a title originally
recorded in
FINE
mode in
SP
mode.
When real-time copying from the HDD to a Video mode
DVD, the chapter markers in the original material are not
copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at
intervals, according to the Auto Chapter (Video) setting
(see also
Auto Chapter (Video)
on page 105).
Frame accuracy and copying
The Frame Accurate setting (see
Frame Accurate
on
page 105) does not affect the actual video content on the
HDD, but it does affect what can be copied and whether
high-speed copying can be used.
When Frame Accurate is set to
Off
, high-speed copying
can generally be used to copy titles in the Copy List, using
a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc in VR or Video mode. However,
copy-once protected material can’t be added to the Copy
List, and the divide points in edited titles may be out by as
much as 0.5 seconds when compared to the orginal.
When Frame Accurate is
On
, you can add copy-once
protected titles to the Copy List and divide points in
edited titles are maintained accurately. However,
depending on the contents of the Copy List and the disc,
high-speed copying may not be used.
DVD disc type
Rec
mode
DVD-RW
Ver. 1.0, 1.1
*1
DVD-R
Ver. 2.0
DVD-RW
Ver. 1.1/2x
*2
DVD-R
Ver. 2.0/4x
*3
EP
10 mins. 5 mins. 2.5 mins.
LP
15 mins. 7.5 mins. 4 mins.
SP
30 mins. 15 mins. 7.5 mins.
FINE
60 mins. 30 mins. 15 mins.
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 62 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Copying and back-up 07
63
En
English
Restrictions on copying
Some video material is copy-once protected. This means
that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely
copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to use a VR mode
DVD-RW disc compatible with CPRM Ver. 1.1 (see
CPRM
on page 48 for more on this), and the following
restrictions apply:
• Only one instance of a copy-once protected title can
be added to the Copy List, and after it’s been copied,
the title is erased from the HDD.
After copying a copy-once protected title to DVD it is
automatically erased from the HDD. It is not therefore
possible to copy a locked title that is copy-once protected.
You can identify copy-once protected material during
playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the
current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark
(
!
) is shown (see
Play display 2
on page 35).
Copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
One Touch Copy* (HDD to DVD)
The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing
title from the HDD to DVD. The whole title is copied,
regardless of where in the title you start copying. The
recorder copies at the maximum speed possible.
For One Touch Copy to work, make sure that a recordable
DVD-R/RW disc is loaded.
* See also
Copyright
above.
•During HDD playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to
copy the current title to DVD.
The front panel display indicates that the title is being
copied. Playback continues while copying.
Note
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail
picture markers (Navimark) for the Disc Navigator,
are also copied. However, if you copy to a Video mode
DVD-R/RW, only the first 32 characters of a name are
copied.
•The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly
the same positions as the original when recording on
to a Video mode disc.
•You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a
title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.
•A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be
copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD-
RW disc for this type of material.
• Low resolution (
EP
or
LP
, or
MN1
–
18
) widescreen
material can’t be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a
VR mode DVD-RW disc for this type of material.
One Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD)
One Touch Copy from DVD to HDD copies a single title to
the HDD in real time. When you start copying, playback
jumps back to the start of the title, then continues
through to the end of the title, when recording
automatically stops. The copy will be made in the
recording mode (
FINE
,
SP
, etc.) that is currently set.
* See also
Copyright
above.
•During DVD playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to
copy the current title to HDD.
Playback starts again from the beginning of the current
title. The front panel display and an on-screen display
indicate that the title is being copied.
Note
• The maximum title length for copying is 6 hours.
• Title name and chapter markers are also copied,
except when copying from a finalized Video mode
disc.
• Thumbnail picture markers (Navimark) and chapter
markers for the Disc Navigator are copied, but their
position in the copy may be slightly changed from the
original.
ONE TOUCH
COPY
HDD DVD
ONE TOUCH
COPY
HDD DVD
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 63 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Copying and back-up
07
64
En
• If some part of the title being copied is copy-
protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected
portions will not be copied.
Canceling One Touch Copy
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started.
•Press and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more than
a second.
Copying is canceled and the video already copied is
erased.
Note
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R copy, the space
available for recording does not return to the pre-
copy figure.
Copying from HDD to DVD*
From the HDD to DVD copy screen you can build up a
Copy List of titles to copy to DVD. From this screen you
can also edit chapters so that the titles appear as you
want them on your finished DVD.
* See also
Copyright
on page 63.
Important
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
•The Copy List is erased if the Frame Accurate setting
is changed in the Initial Settings menu (see
Frame
Accurate
on page 105), or if the Input Line System
setting is changed (see
Input Line System
on
page 95).
• The Copy List is also erased if any Original titles are
erased or edited (this includes titles that are changed
through Auto Replace Recording, and copy-once
protected titles).
• Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder
on page 109) will also erase the
Copy List.
Next
HDD
HDD to DVD Copy
Add
Erase
Move
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List
All
16:00 Sun
8/11
Pr 5 LP
Total 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Currently selected HDD title
Title which cannot be
added to Copy List
HDD Groups
Titles in the selected
HDD Group
Information for the
selected title
Copy List titles
Running time of the
Copy List
Copy List
menu options
HOME
MENU
ENTER
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 64 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Copying and back-up 07
65
En
English
1Press HOME MENU.
2 Select ‘Copy’.
3 Select ‘HDD
DVD’.
4Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to select
a command from the Copy List menu options on the
left side of the screen.
The following commands are available:
•
Add
– Select and add titles to the Copy List (see
page 65).
•
Chapter Edit
(
Chpt Edit
) – Edit chapters within a
Copy List title (see page 66).
•
Move
– Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see page 67).
•
Erase All
– Erase the Copy List (see page 68).
•
Next
– Start recording using the current Copy List
(see step
5
below).
•
Preview
– Check the content of a title in the Copy List
(see page 68).
•
Erase
– Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
page 68).
•
Title Name
(
Ttl Name
) – Name or rename titles in
the Copy List (see page 68).
•
Divide
– Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see
page 69).
•
Combine
– Combine two adjacent titles in the Copy
List into one (see page 69).
5 Select ‘Next’ to proceed to the copy settings
screen.
6Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
the Recording Mode.
•
High Speed Copy
– The Copy List is copied at the
same recording quality as the original. (See page 62
for more information on high-speed copying.)
•
FINE
,
SP
,
LP
,
EP
,
MN
– The Copy List is copied at the
specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if
you copy at a higher quality setting than the original,
the copy will not be better quality than the original.)
•If you select
MN
above, you can also change the level
setting (
MN1
–
MN32
) from the Recording Quality box
that appears.
•
Optimized
– The recording quality is automatically
adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space
available on the disc.
When you change the recording quality setting, you can
see how much disc space it will require. If this is more
than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able
to start copying. In this case, either change the recording
quality, or press
RETURN
to go back to the Copy List
screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List.
7 Select ‘Start’ to begin copying.
Note
• When the copy mode is set to something other than
High Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD,
the chapter markers of the original are not copied.
Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular
intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see
also
Auto Chapter (Video)
on page 105).
Add
Use this command to add one or more titles to the Copy
List.
1 Select ‘Add’ from the Copy List menu options.
2Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the HDD to add to the Copy List, then
press ENTER.
The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the
lower half of the screen.
•To change the displayed information for the selected
title, press
DISPLAY
.
Timer Recording
Disc History
PhotoViewer
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
DV Record
HDD
HDD to DVD Copy
Add
Erase
Move
Divide
Combine
HDD DVD-RW VIDEO
Required 0h52m
Recording Mode
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4049MB
4467MB
/ 4467MB
Next
High Speed
Start
Next
HDD
Add
Erase
Move
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List
All
16:00 Sun
8/11
Pr 5 LP
Tot al 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
HDD to DVD Copy
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 65 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Copying and back-up
07
66
En
•You can select titles from the whole HDD, or you can
search through a single group. To select a group,
press
(cursor up), then use
/
(cursor left/
right) and
ENTER
to select a group. Press
(cursor
down) to return to title selection.
3Repeat step 2 to add more titles to the Copy List,
or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu
options.
Note
• When Frame Accurate is set to
Off
(see
Frame
Accurate
on page 105), the following limitations on
adding titles to the Copy List apply:
– When adding titles that contain copy-once
protected material, the copy-once parts will not be
added to the Copy List.
– When adding titles that contain material of more
than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a
different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title.
– Widescreen material recorded in
LP
,
EP
or
MN1
–
18
will not be added to the Copy List.
– Chapter markers on the copy may be up to 0.5
seconds off compared to the original.
– Titles that contain more than 99 chapters cannot be
added to the Copy List.
• Only titles which were recorded in the same TV
system as the recorder is currently set to can be
added to the Copy List.
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit)
Use this command to edit a Copy List title; for example,
erasing individual chapters, creating new chapters, re-
arranging the chapter order, and so on.
1 Select ‘Chpt Edit’ from the Copy List menu
options.
2Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to edit, then press ENTER.
The chapter editing screen appears with thumbnails of
each chapter.
3Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to select
a command from the menu on the left side of the
screen.
The following commands are available:
•
Erase
– Erase individual chapters: Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to select a chapter to erase, then
press
ENTER
.
•
Divide
– Divide a chapter into two or more new
chapters: See
Edit Chapter: Divide
below.
•
Combine
– Combine two previously divided chapters
back into one: See
Edit Chapter: Combine
below.
•
Move
– Change the order of the chapters: See
Edit
Chapter: Move
below.
•
Preview
– Check the content of a chapter: Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to select a chapter, then
press
ENTER
. Once the preview has started, press
STOP
to return to the chapter edit screen.
4 Press RETURN or select ‘Back’ to go back to the
main Copy List screen.
Chapter Edit: Divide
You can divide a chapter into as many new chapters as
necessary.
1Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to select the
chapter to divide, then press ENTER.
2Use the playback controls to find the place where
you want to divide the chapter, then press ENTER.
You can use all the usual playback controls, including
PLAY
,
PAUSE
, scan (
,
), and slow-motion
(
,
).
Next
HDD
Preview
Erase All
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List
All
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Tot al 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
HDD to DVD Copy
1/1
HDD
Chapter Edit
Erase
Divide
Combine
Move
Preview
1 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Title
2
Chapter
- - - h - - m
2
Back
HDD
Divide Chapter
Erase
Divide
Combine
Move
Preview
Chapter 1
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Title
2
Chapter
0h05m
2-1 0.02.34.56
Play Pause
Divide
Exit
Back
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 66 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Copying and back-up 07
67
En
English
• When you press
ENTER
, make sure that
Divide
is
highlighted.
3 To return to the main screen, select ‘Exit’ and
press ENTER.
Note
• When Frame Accurate is set to
Off
(see
Frame
Accurate
on page 105), the divide points may move by
up to 0.5 seconds after selecting
Divide
.
• One title can be divided into a maximum of 99
chapters.
Chapter Edit: Combine
This command lets you combine two chapters into one.
1Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to select the
space between the chapters to combine.
2 Press ENTER to combine.
Chapter Edit: Move
This command lets you rearrange the chapters within a
Copy List title.
1Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to select the
chapter you want to move, then press ENTER.
2 Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to select a
new position for the chapter, then press ENTER.
The thumbnails in the chapter list reflect the new order.
Move
Use this command to change the order of titles currently
in the Copy List.
1 Select ‘Move’ from the Copy List menu options.
2Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to move, then press ENTER.
The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the
lower half of the screen.
1/1
HDD
Chapter Edit
Erase
Divide
Combine
Move
Preview
1 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Title
2
Chapter
0h05m
2
Back
1/1
HDD
Chapter Edit
Back
Erase
Divide
Combine
Move
Preview
1 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Title
2
Chapter
0h05m
2
1/1
HDD
Chapter Edit
Erase
Divide
Combine
Move
Preview
1 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Title
2
Chapter
0h05m
2
Back
Insertion point
Title to move
Next
HDD
HDD to DVD Copy
Add
Erase
Move
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List
All
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Tot al 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 67 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Copying and back-up
07
68
En
3Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
a new position for the title, then press ENTER.
The thumbnails in the Copy List reflect the new order.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move other titles in the
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy
List menu options.
Erase All
Use this command to erase the Copy List.
1 Select ‘Erase All’ from the Copy List menu
options.
2 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
Preview
Use this command to check the content of a title in the
Copy List.
1 Select ‘Preview’ from the Copy List menu
options.
2Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to preview, then press
ENTER.
The selected title starts playing. You can return to the
Copy List screen by pressing
STOP
, otherwise
playback will continue until the end of the Copy List.
• During preview, you can select a new thumbnail for
the Disc Navigator by pressing
NAVI MARK
.
Erase
Use this command to erase individual titles from the
Copy List.
1 Select ‘Erase’ from the Copy List menu options.
2Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to erase, then press ENTER.
3Select ‘Yes’ to confirm that you want to erase the
title, or ‘No’ to cancel.
4Repeat step 2 to erase more titles from the Copy
List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List
menu options.
Title Name (Ttl Name)
Use this command to name or rename titles in the Copy
List (the names of the original titles remain unchanged).
1 Select ‘Ttl Name’ from the Copy List menu
options.
2Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to name or rename, then
press ENTER.
Next
HDD
HDD to DVD Copy
Add
Erase
Move
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List
All
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Tot al 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Copy List insertion point
Title to move
Next
HDD
HDD to DVD Copy
Preview
Erase All
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List
All
Tot al 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Erase all titles ?
Yes No
Next
HDD
HDD to DVD Copy
Add
Erase
Move
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List
All
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Tot al 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Next
HDD
HDD to DVD Copy
Preview
Erase All
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List
All
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Tot al 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 68 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Copying and back-up 07
69
En
English
3 Input a name for the selected title, then press
ENTER.
• Use the
///
(cursor buttons) and
ENTER
to
select characters.
•A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the
/
buttons to change the cursor
position.
• Select
CAPS
or
small
to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the
CASE SELECTION
buttons (
/
).
• You can also use the
CLEAR
button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for 2 seconds to
delete the whole name). For other remote control key
shortcuts, see
Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name
on page 78.
• Press
RETURN
to go back to the Copy List screen
without changing the name.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to name other titles in the
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy
List menu options.
Divide
Use this command to make two titles from a title already
in the Copy List.
1 Select ‘Divide’ from the Copy List menu options.
2Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to divide, then press ENTER.
3Use the playback controls to find the place where
you want to divide the title, then press ENTER.
You can use all the usual playback controls, including
PLAY
,
PAUSE
, scan (
,
), and slow-motion
(
,
).
Note
• When Frame Accurate is set to
Off
(see
Frame
Accurate
on page 105), the divide points may move by
up to 0.5 seconds after selecting
Divide
.
Combine
Use this command to make a single title from two
adjacent titles already in the Copy List.
1 Select ‘Combine’ from the Copy List menu
options.
2Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
two adjacent titles from the Copy List to combine,
then press ENTER.
3 Repeat step 2 to combine more titles, or press
RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options.
Note
• When Frame Accurate is set to
Off
(see
Frame
Accurate
on page 105), the following limitations apply
when combining titles:
– Mixed aspect ratios (16:9, 4:3, 4:3 (letter box)) can’t
be combined.
– Mixed recording modes (
EP
/
MN1
–
6
,
LP
/
MN7
–
18
,
SP
/
MN19
–
31
,
FINE
/
MN32
) can’t be combined.
Input Title Name
CAPS
small
OK Delete Space
A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? !
N
O
P
Q
R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ;
A A A A A A
Æ
ç E E E E I I I I #
2 3
´ µ ¶ ·
1
¿ `
D
N
O
O
O
O
O
ø
U U U U Y ß $
%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
<
=
>
_ &
£ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ® _ ˚
+ – / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { | } ~ ¡
c
a
–
o
–
<<
<<
1
/41
/23
/4
¸
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Next
HDD
Add
Erase
Move
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List
All
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Tot al 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
HDD to DVD Copy
Next
HDD
HDD to DVD Copy
Add
Erase
Move
Divide
Combine
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Title 2
2-1 0.25.00.00
Play Pause
Divide
Cancel
Next
HDD
HDD to DVD Copy
Add
Erase
Move
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List
All
Tot al 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 69 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Copying and back-up
07
70
En
Copying from DVD to HDD*
Use the Copy screen to transfer material from DVD to the
hard disk.
* See also
Copyright
on page 63.
Important
•The DVD to HDD copy screen is not accessible when
a finalized Video mode disc is loaded. However, you
can still use the One Touch Copy function (see
One
Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD)
on page 63).
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
• The copy list will be erased if:
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or
edited.
– the disc tray is opened.
– the Disc Navigator is switched between Original
and Play List.
– the DVD disc is reinitialized or finalized.
– the recorder is reset.
1Press HOME MENU.
2 Select ‘Copy’.
• Note that the
Copy
option will not be available if the
TV system of the recorder and the disc do not match.
(See
Input Line System
on page 95 for how to change
the TV system of the recorder.)
3 Select ‘DVD
HDD’.
4Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to select
a command from Copy List menu options.
The following commands are available:
•
Add
– Select and add titles to the Copy List.
•
Move
– Change the order of titles in the Copy List.
•
Erase All
– Erase the Copy List.
•
Next
– Start recording using the current Copy List
(see step
5
below).
•
Preview
– Check the content of a title in the Copy
List.
•
Erase
– Erase individual titles from the Copy List.
You can find more detailed instructions for each
command in the following sections.
Original
Next
DVD
DVD to HDD Copy
Add
Erase
Move
Preview
Erase All
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List
16:00 Sun11/08 Pr 5 LP
Total 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Currently selected DVD title
Information for the
selected title
Copy List titles
Running time of the
Copy List
Copy List
menu options
HOME
MENU
ENTER
Timer Recording
Disc History
PhotoViewer
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
DV Record
07 Copying.fm 70 ページ ２００３年９月１７日 水曜日 午後８時１６分
Copying and back-up 07
71
En
English
5 Select ‘Next’ to proceed to the copy settings
screen.
6Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
the recording quality.
•
High-Speed Copy
– Only available when copying
Original content to a VR mode disc. The Copy List is
copied at the same recording quality as the original.
(See page 62 for more information on high-speed
copying.)
•
FINE
,
SP
,
LP
,
EP
,
MN
– The Copy List is copied at the
specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if
you copy at a higher quality setting than the original,
the copy will not be better quality than the original.)
•If you select
MN
above, you can also change the level
setting (
MN1
–
MN32
) from the Recording Quality box
that appears.
When you change the recording quality setting, you can
see how much hard disk space it will require. If this is
more than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t
be able to start copying. In this case, either change the
recording quality, or press
RETURN
to go back to the
Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the
Copy List.
7 Select ‘Start’ to begin copying.
Add
Use this command to add one or more titles to the Copy
List.
1 Select ‘Add’ from the Copy List menu options.
2Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the DVD to add to the Copy List, then
press ENTER.
The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the
lower half of the screen.
• You can’t add titles which would make the total
running time of the Copy List more than 6 hours.
3Repeat step 2 to add more titles to the Copy List,
or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu
options.
Note
•Titles which were recorded directly to a VR mode disc
or have already been copied real-time, and which
contain bilingual audio or are recorded in recording
modes
MN12
–
MN20
can be added to the Copy List,
however if
High-Speed Copy
is selected they will not
actually be copied.
• Similarly, a copy-once protected title, recorded from
the TV for example, can be added to the Copy List, but
it will not be copied if
High-Speed Copy
is selected.
Move
Use this command to change the order of titles currently
in the Copy List.
1 Select ‘Move’ from the Copy List menu options.
2Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to move, then press ENTER.
DVD
SP
Start
DVD HDD
Required 1h30m
Recording Mode
Copy List Total
Current HDD Remain
1h30m
30h00m
/ 34h00m
Next
Original
DVD to HDD Copy
Add
Erase
Move
Preview
Erase All
Play List
Next
DVD
DVD to HDD Copy
Add
Erase
Move
Preview
Erase All
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List
16:00 Sun11/08
Pr 5 LP
Total 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Play List
Next
DVD
DVD to HDD Copy
Add
Erase
Move
Preview
Erase All
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Total 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 71 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Copying and back-up
07
72
En
3Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
the insertion point for the title, then press ENTER.
The thumbnails in the Copy List are updated to reflect the
new order.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move other titles in the
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy
List menu options.
Erase
Use this command to erase individual titles from the
Copy List.
1 Select ‘Erase’ from the Copy List menu options.
2Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to erase, then press ENTER.
3Repeat step 2 to erase more titles from the Copy
List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List
menu options.
Preview
Use this command to check the content of a title in the
Copy List.
1 Select ‘Preview’ from the Copy List menu
options.
2Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to preview, then press
ENTER.
The selected title starts playing. You can return to the
Copy List screen by pressing
STOP
, otherwise
playback will continue until the end of the Copy List.
Erase All
Use this command to erase the Copy List.
1 Select ‘Erase All’ from the Copy List menu
options.
2 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
Using disc back-up*
This feature offers a simple way to make a back-up copy
of a finalized Video mode disc. The data is copied first to
the hard disk drive, then on to another recordable DVD
disc.
* See also
Copyright
on page 63.
1Press HOME MENU.
2 Select ‘Copy’
3 Select ‘Disc Back-up’.
4 Select a back-up option.
There are three back-up options:
•
Start new disc back-up
– Start making a back-up of
a disc.
Play List
Next
DVD
DVD to HDD Copy
Add
Erase
Move
Preview
Erase All
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Total 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Copy List insertion point
Title to move
Play List
Next
DVD
DVD to HDD Copy
Add
Erase
Move
Preview
Erase All
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List
15:00 Wed
7/10
Pr 5 LP
Total 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Play List
Next
DVD
DVD to HDD Copy
Add
Erase
Move
Preview
Erase All
DVD
DVD
HDD
HDD
1
1/3
1/2Copy List To tal 1h30m
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Erase all titles ?
Yes No
Start new disc back-up
Resume writing data
Erase back-up data
Disc Back-up
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 72 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Copying and back-up 07
73
En
English
•
Resume writing data
– Record the back-up data
already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.
•
Erase back-up data
– Erase the back-up data on the
HDD.
5 Press
OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and
load the disc you want to make a back-up of, then
close the disc tray.
You can only make back-up copies of finalized Video
mode discs.
6 Select ‘Start’.
• To see the progress of the back-up, press
DISPLAY
.
•You can cancel the back-up process by pressing
ONE
TOUCH COPY
for more than 1 second.
7 When the data has been copied, press
OPEN/
CLOSE to open the disc tray. Take out the disc and
load a blank recordable DVD.
The table below shows the discs you can use for back-up
when the source disc is DVD-R and DVD-RW:
*1
Ver. 2.0 for General DVD-R disc
*2
Ver. 1.1 DVD-RW disc
•Note that the actual recordable capacity of discs vary.
8Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data
to the blank disc.
• To see the progress of the back-up, press
DISPLAY
.
•You can cancel the back-up process by pressing
ONE
TOUCH COPY
for more than 1 second. However, this
will make the disc unusable (although if you are
using a DVD-RW disc you can re-initialize it in order
to make it usable again—see
Initializing a DVD-RW
disc
on page 61.)
9 After the recorder has finished recording the
back-up disc, you can select whether to make
another back-up of the same data or exit.
• Select
Start
to make another back-up copy or
Cancel
to finish. If you want to make another back-up copy,
return to step
6
above.
10 If you don’t need to keep the back-up data on
the HDD, you can delete it now.
Select
Yes
to delete the data from the HDD; select
No
to
keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).
• If you decide to leave the back-up data on the HDD,
you can make back-up copies to recordable DVD
discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.
back-up
DVD-R
*1
DVD-RW
*2
DVD-R
DVD-RW
No Disc.
Please load a disc to be backed-up.
Start Cancel
Disc Back-up
Read from disc and save to HDD.
Start reading?
Start Cancel
Disc Back-up
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.
Please eject the disc and load a
recordable disc.
Start Cancel
Disc Back-up
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.
The disc contents will be overwritten.
OK to start?
Start Cancel
Disc Back-up
Disc back-up finished.
To make another back-up copy, please load
a recordable disc.
Start Cancel
Disc Back-up
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.
Erasing it will increase the free space
available. OK to Erase?
Disc Back-up
Yes No
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 73 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Editing
08
74
En
Chapter 8
Editing
Using the Disc Navigator you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD discs, as well as
video content on the internal hard disk drive (HDD). The editing features available in the Disc Navigator depend on
whether you are editing video on a Video mode or VR mode DVD, or the HDD, and whether you’re editing Original
content, or a Play List.
With unfinalized Video mode DVDs, there are a limited number of editing commands, including naming, locking and
erasing titles. Once a Video mode disc has been finalized, further editing is not possible. You can still use the Disc
Navigator to select titles for playback, however (see
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc.
on
page 37).
There are two ways to edit VR mode DVD-RW discs. You can directly edit the Original content of the disc, or you can
create and edit a Play List. The Play List doesn’t actually change any of the content on the disc, but just controls how
the content is played back (rather like the program play feature found on CD players).
Editing material recorded on the HDD is similar to editing the Original content of a VR mode DVD-RW, with similar
commands for erasing, naming and locking titles, as well as fine control over the content of chapters within titles.
The Disc Navigator screen
DVD Disc Navigator
Video Mode
1/1
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h30m40s
Undo
DVD
123
456
Disc Navigator
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Lock
All Erase
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Edit mode
Disc Navigator
menu options
Disc recording
mode
Number of title
pages
Locked title
indicator
Information for
selected title
Recording time
available in the displayed
recording mode
Currently selected title
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 74 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Editing 08
75
En
English
HDD Disc Navigator
Important
• Titles that have been recorded with a Line Input
setting different to the current setting of the recorder
are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank
thumbnail image.
• During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator
for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a
mark. These titles were recorded with a Line Input
setting different to the current setting of the recorder.
During recording, these titles cannot be played.
• See also
Input Line System
on page 95.
1Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or
the DVD.
2 Press DISC NAVIGATOR to display the Disc
Navigator screen.
Playback should be stopped when you do this.
• You can also access it from the Home Menu (press
HOME MENU
, select
Disc Navigator
then press
ENTER
)
•When selecting titles, use the
PREV
(
) and
NEXT
(
) buttons to display the previous/next page if
there are more than six titles.
HDD
All
1/1
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h30m40s
123
456
Disc Navigator
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
Chg Group
HDD Remain
6h12m(FINE)
All
Group1 Group2 Group3 Group4
NEW
Auto Replace
Recording indicator
Disc Navigator
menu options
Disc recording
mode
Number of title
pages
Locked title
indicator
Information for
selected title
Recording time
available in the displayed
recording mode
New indicator
Currently selected title HDD group tabs
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR PLAY LIST
HOME
MENU
HDD DVD
ENTER
CLEAR
PREV
PLAY
NEXT
Original
1/1
Undo
DVD
123
456
Disc Navigator
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 75 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Editing
08
76
En
•If you are editing a VR mode disc, press
PLAYLIST
to
switch between Original and Play List Disc Navigator
screens.
On the left side of the screen are the Disc Navigator
menu options. The main part of the screen shows
thumbnails of the titles on the disc. You can change
these thumbnails using the
NAVI MARK
button—see
Changing the thumbnail picture for a title
on page 38.
In the center is displayed information on the currently
selected title. Press
DISPLAY
to change the information
displayed.
Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to highlight a
menu option, then press
ENTER
. Depending on the menu
option, you might have to select a title. Use the
///
(cursor buttons) followed by
ENTER
to select a title.
When editing HDD content, a row of group names
appears above the title thumbnails (see
Editing HDD
groups
on page 81 for more details). You can access
these by pressing
(cursor up) repeatedly until the
All
group is highlighted, then using the
/
(cursor left/
right) buttons to select a group. Press
ENTER
to ‘open’
the highlighted group.
Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are timer
recordings set to Auto Replace Recording (see
Standard
timer recording
on page 52).
Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are recently
recorded titles that you are seeing for the first time in the
Disc Navigator.
3 To exit the Disc Navigator, press HOME MENU
.
Disc Navigator menu options
The commands available from the Disc Navigator for
different disc types is shown below.
•
Play
– Play a title (page 77)
•
Title Name
(
Ttl Name
) – Name or rename a title
(page 78)
•
Lock/Unlock
– Lock or unlock a title to prevent
accidental changes being made (page 80)
•
Erase
– Erase a title (page 77)
•
Erase All
– Erase all titles (page 80)
•
Undo
– Undo the last change (page 80)
(Original)
•
Play
– Play a title (page 77)
•
Title Name
(
Ttl Name
) – Name or rename a title
(page 78)
•
Lock/Unlock
– Lock or unlock a title to prevent
accidental changes being made (page 80)
•
Erase
– Erase a title (page 77)
•
Erase All
– Erase all titles (page 80)
•
Undo
– Undo the last change (page 80)
•
Chapter Edit
(
Chpt Edit
) – Make detailed changes to
chapters in a title (page 78)
•
Play
– Play a title (page 77)
•
Title Name
(
Ttl Name
) – Name or rename a title
(page 78)
•
Lock/Unlock
– Lock or unlock a title to prevent
accidental changes being made (page 80)
•
Erase
– Erase a title (page 77)
•
Erase All
– Erase all titles (page 80)
•
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit)
– Make detailed changes
to chapters in a title (page 78)
•
Divide
– Divide a title into two (page 81)
•
Change Group
(
Chg Group
) – Assign a title to a
group on the HDD (page 81)
•
Group Name
(
Grp Name
) – Name or rename an
HDD group (page 81)
Play List
1/1
Undo
DVD
123
456
Disc Navigator
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Playlist / Original indicator
Video mode
VR mode
HDD
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 76 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Editing 08
77
En
English
(Play List)
•
Create
– Make a new Play List title (page 82)
•
Chapter Edit
(
Chpt Edit
) – Make detailed changes to
chapters in a Play List title (page 83)
•
Move
– Move the position of a title in the Play List
(page 84)
•
Erase All
– Erase all titles in the Play List (page 85)
•
Undo
– Undo the last change (page 85)
•
Play
– Play a title (page 82)
•
Erase
– Erase a title from the Play List (page 82)
•
Title Name
(
Ttl Name
) – Name or rename a title in
the Play List (page 82)
•
Combine
– Combine two Play List titles into one
(page 85)
•
Divide
– Divide a Play List title into two (page 85)
Editing VR mode Original, Video
mode and HDD content
These commands affect the actual content stored on the
DVD-R/RW or HDD.
Remember
•If you are editing a VR mode disc, use the
PLAYLIST
button to switch to the Disc Navigator Original
screen.
Play
Use this function to start playback of a title.
1 Select ‘Play’ from the Disc Navigator menu
options.
2Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to select the
title you want to play, then press ENTER or
PLAY.
Playback of the title you selected starts.
Erase
The Erase title command does slightly different things
depending on what you are currently editing. If you are
editing Original content on a VR mode disc or content on
the HDD, the title will be erased from the disc and the
available recording time will increase accordingly.
If you erase titles from a Video mode DVD-R disc, the title
will disappear from the list of titles, but the available
recording time will not increase. Erasing a title from a
Video mode DVD-RW disc increases the available
recording time only if it is the last title on the disc.
1 Select ‘Erase’ from the Disc Navigator menu
options.
2Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to select the
title you want to erase, then press ENTER.
• If you’re editing from the HDD, remember that the
title you’re looking for may be in a different group
from the one displayed.
3Highlight ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
Tip
•You can erase a title quickly by pressing
CLEAR
when
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing
ENTER
.
VR mode
VR mode Video mode HDD
1/1
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
Undo
DVD
123
456
Disc Navigator
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Lock
Erase All
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Video Mode
VR mode Video mode HDD
Original
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
1/1
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
Undo
DVD
123
4
Disc Navigator
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
Erase Title? Yes No
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 77 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Editing
08
78
En
Title Name (Ttl Name)
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long
for VR mode and HDD recordings and 32 characters for
Video mode recordings.
1 Select ‘Ttl Name’ from the Disc Navigator menu
options.
2Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to select the
title you want to name, then press ENTER to go to
the name input screen.
3 Input a name for the selected title.
• Use the
///
(cursor buttons) and
ENTER
to
select characters.
•A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the
/
buttons to change the cursor
position.
• Select
CAPS
or
small
to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the
CASE SELECTION
buttons (
/
).
• You can also use the
CLEAR
button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for 2 seconds to
delete the whole name). For other remote control key
shortcuts, see
Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name
below.
•For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
4 Highlight ‘OK’ then press ENTER to enter the
name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen.
• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without
saving changes to the title name, press
RETURN
.
5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to name.
Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name
The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts
that you can use to input characters in the name input
screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the
characters shown.
If you want to enter two characters in succession that are
both on the same button (for example a
P
and an
R
),
press
to advance the cursor one space manually
between inputting the two characters.
*1
lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit)
When editing VR mode DVDs or video on the HDD you
can edit individual chapters within a title, with
commands for erasing, combining and dividing. You can
also play individual chapters to check their content.
1 Select ‘Chpt Edit’ from the Disc Navigator menu
options.
2Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to select the
title that contains the chapters you want to edit,
then press ENTER.
VR mode Video mode HDD
Input Title Name
CAPS
small
OK Clear Space
A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? !
N
O
P
Q
R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ;
A A A A A A
Æ
ç E E E E I I I I #
2 3
´ µ ¶ ·
1
¿ `
D
N
O
O
O
O
O
ø
U U U U Y ß $
%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
<
=
>
_ &
£ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ® _ ˚
+ – / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { | } ~ ¡
c
a
–
o
–
<<
<<
1
/41
/23
/4
¸
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
Key Characters Key Characters
1
. , ‘ ? ! – & 1
6
m n o 6 ö ô ò ó ø ñ
2
a b c 2 ä à á â ã
æ ç
7
p q r s 7 $
ÿ/ß
*1
3
d e f 3 è é ë ê
8
t u v 8 ü ù û ú
4
g h i 4 î ï ì í ¡
9
w x y z 9
5
j k l 5 £
0
0
[cursor back]
[cursor forward]
/
[change case]
CLEAR
[clear character]
<space>
[finish name input]
Show-
View
~
( ) _ / : ; “ ‘ ^ @ #
∗
% ¥ | + =
{ } [ ] < >
VR mode HDD
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 78 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Editing 08
79
En
English
After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear
and you’ll see that the Disc Navigator menu items
change to the chapter editing commands:
•
Erase
– Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want
to erase and press
ENTER
(see also notes below).
•
Divide
– Split a chapter into two: Select the chapter
you want to divide and press
ENTER
(up to a limit of
999 chapters per disc).
•
Combine
– Combine two adjacent chapters into one:
Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent
chapters and press
ENTER
(see also note below)
•
Preview
– Preview chapters: Select the chapter you
want to play; press
STOP
to return to the chapter
edit screen.
•
Undo
– Undo the last command (only works with VR
mode disc edits).
3Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
the left side of the screen.
4 To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press
RETURN again, or select ‘Back’ from the menu
options on the left.
Note
• It may not be possible to erase chapters less than 5
seconds long.
• It may not always be possible to combine two
chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter
has been divided into three, then the middle chapter
erased, it is not possible to combine the two
remaining chapters into one.
Inserting chapter markers into a title
You can create new chapters within a title using the
CHP
MARK
button while playing the title or during recording.
This is useful not just for navigation of the disc content
but also for editing purposes.
1 Start playback of the title you want to create
new chapter markers in.
You can use the
Play
command from the Disc Navigator
menu to do this.
2Press CHP MARK at any point where you want a
new chapter to begin.
A chapter marker icon appears on-screen briefly to
confirm a new chapter mark has been inserted:
•For greater control over the exact position of chapter
markers it can be useful to use the
PAUSE
button
and/or the slow-motion and frame advance/reverse
controls (
/
).
Note
•You cannot insert chapter markers during Auto Start
Recording.
• If you pause a recording in VR mode, the recorder
automatically starts a new chapter when you restart
the recording.
• When recording in Video mode, the recorder
automatically puts chapter markers in at regular
intervals. It is not possible to add extra chapter
markers manually after recording (see also
Auto
Chapter (Video)
on page 105).
•The Play List and Original content on a disc can each
contain up to 999 chapters.
• Similar chapter editing commands are available for
HDD content from the HDD to DVD copy screen. See
also
Copying from HDD to DVD*
on page 64.
Original
DVD
1/1
Chapter Edit
Back
Erase
Divide
Combine
Preview
Undo
1 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Title
1
Chapter
0h03m
2
Original
Chapter 1
Back
DVD
Divide Chapter
Erase
Divide
Combine
Preview
Undo
15:00 Wed13/12 Pr 5 LP
Title
1
Chapter
0h03m
1-1 0.02.12.00
Play Pause
Divide
Exit
VR mode HDD
CHP
MARK
PAUSE
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 79 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Editing
08
80
En
Lock / Unlock
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased
accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock
it later.
Important
• You can’t undo any edits made before changing the
lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock
command using the
Undo
option from the Disc
Navigator menu.
1 Select ‘Lock’ from the Disc Navigator menu
options.
2Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to select the
title you want to lock (or unlock), then press ENTER.
An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be
unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator
with a padlock icon.
• If you’re editing from the HDD, remember that the
title you’re looking for may be in a different group
from the one displayed.
3 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to lock/unlock.
Erase All
This erases all unlocked titles from the disc (see also
Lock
/ Unlock
on page 80).
1 Select ‘Erase All’ from the Disc Navigator menu
options.
2 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
Undo
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally
undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words,
you can undo the last three edits you made).
• Select ‘Undo’ from the Disc Navigator menu
options.
• You can’t undo anything after ejecting the disc from
the recorder or switching the recorder into standby.
• You can’t undo the following operations: initializing,
recording or finalizing a disc, locking and unlocking
titles.
• You can still undo edits after exiting the Disc
Navigator screen.
VR mode Video mode HDD
Original
1/1
12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP
Undo
DVD
123
4
Disc Navigator
Lock
Erase All
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
VR mode Video mode HDD
Original
1/1
Undo
DVD
123
4
Disc Navigator
Erase all titles?
Lock
Erase All
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Yes No
VR mode Video mode
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 80 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Editing 08
81
En
English
Divide
Use this command to divide a title on the HDD into two.
Note that once divided, the two new titles cannot be
recombined into one again.
1 Select ‘Divide’ from the Disc Navigator menu
options.
2 Select the title that you want to divide, then
press ENTER.
3 Use the standard playback controls to find the
place you want to divide the title.
4With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide
the title at the current playback position.
5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm you want to divide the
title.
Select
No
if you want to cancel and leave the title intact.
6 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to divide.
Editing HDD groups
The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be
many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize
your HDD video content there are four ‘groups’. You can
move content from group to group, and rename the
groups as you want.
Change Group (Chg Group)
Use this command to assign titles to a particular group.
1 Select ‘Chg Group’ from the Disc Navigator
menu, then press ENTER.
2 Select the title that you want to put into a
different group, then press ENTER.
Titles from the
All
group are displayed (all titles on the
HDD).
3Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to select
a group for the title, then press ENTER.
• You can select one of the four groups, or choose to
make the title ‘ungrouped’, in which case it will only
appear in the
All
group.
4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to change the
group of.
Group Name (Grp Name)
Use this command to rename a group.
1Select ‘Grp Name’ from the Disc Navigator menu.
2Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
the group that you want to name or rename, then
press ENTER.
3 Input a name for the group.
The name can be up to 6 characters long.
4To finish entering the name, highlight ‘Exit’ and
press ENTER.
HDD
HDD
All
Title 2 15
:00 Wed13/12 Pr 5 LP
Divide Title
Lock
All Erase
Grp Name
Divide
1-1 0.02.12.00
Play Pause
Divide
Cancel
HDD
HDD
Group1
Group2
Group3
Group4
No Group
HDD
All
Title 1 21:00 Fri 6/09 Pr 5 LP
Disc Navigator
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
Chg Group
HDD
Input Group Name
CAPS
small
OK Clear Space
A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? !
N
O
P
Q
R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ;
A A A A A A
Æ
ç E E E E I I I I #
2 3
´ µ ¶ ·
1
¿ `
D
N
O
O
O
O
O
ø
U U U U Y ß $
%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
<
=
>
_ &
£ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ® _ ˚
+ – / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { | } ~ ¡
c
a
–
o
–
<<
<<
1
/41
/23
/4
¸
Group 1
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 81 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Editing
08
82
En
5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another group to name.
Creating and editing a VR mode Play
List
A Play List is a kind of virtual content based on the actual
(Original) content of the disc. The main advantages of
this type of editing is that it is non-destructive of the video
content on the disc, and it allows greater control over
editing, so that you end up with the content exactly as you
want it.
Remember
• Use the
PLAYLIST
button to switch to the Play List
edit screen.
• The Play List can contain a maximum of 99 titles.
Play
Use this function to start playback of a title.
1 Select ‘Play’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
2 Select the title you want to play, then press
ENTER.
Playback of the title you selected starts.
Erase
This command erases a title only from the Play List. The
title remains in the Original content and the available
recording time does not increase.
1 Select ‘Erase’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
2 Select the title you want to erase, then press
ENTER.
3Highlight ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
Note
• The remaining recording time doesn’t change when
you erase something from the Play List.
Title Name (Ttl Name)
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters
long.
1 Select ‘Ttl Name’ from the Disc Navigator Play
List menu options.
2 Select the title you want to name, then press
ENTER.
3 Input a name for the selected title.
Press
ENTER
after selecting each character.
VR mode
VR mode
Play List
1/1
Undo
DVD
123
4
Disc Navigator
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
VR mode
Play List
1/1
Undo
DVD
123
4
Disc Navigator
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Erase Title? Yes No
VR mode
Input Title Name
CAPS
small
OK Clear Space
A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? !
N
O
P
Q
R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ;
A A A A A A
Æ
ç E E E E I I I I #
2 3
´ µ ¶ ·
1
¿ `
D
N
O
O
O
O
O
ø
U U U U Y ß $
%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
<
=
>
_ &
£ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ® _ ˚
+ – / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { | } ~ ¡
c
a
–
o
–
<<
<<
1
/41
/23
/4
¸
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 82 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Editing 08
83
En
English
•A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the
/
buttons to change the cursor
position.
• Select
CAPS
or
small
to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the
CASE SELECTION
buttons (
/
).
• You can also use the
CLEAR
button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for 2 seconds to
delete the whole name). For other remote control key
shortcuts, see
Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name
on page 78.
•For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
4Highlight ‘OK’, then press ENTER to fix the name
and return to the main Disc Navigator screen.
• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without
saving changes to the title name, press
RETURN
.
5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to name.
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit)
When editing VR mode DVDs you can edit individual
chapters within a title, with commands for erasing,
moving, combining and dividing. You can also play
individual chapters to check their content.
1 Select ‘Chpt Edit’ from the Disc Navigator Play
List menu options.
2 Select the title that contains the chapters you
want to edit, then press ENTER.
After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear
and you’ll see that the Disc Navigator menu items
change to the chapter editing commands:
•
Erase
– Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want
to erase and press
ENTER
.
•
Divide
– Split a chapter into two: Select the chapter
you want to divide and press
ENTER
.
•
Combine
– Combine two adjacent chapters into one:
Select the dividing line between two adjacent
chapters and press
ENTER
.
•
Move
– Rearrange chapters: Select the chapter you
want to move, press
ENTER
, then highlight the new
location for it, then press
ENTER
again.
•
Preview
– Preview chapters: Select the chapter you
want to play; press
STOP
to return to the chapter
edit screen.
•
Undo
– Undo the last command.
3Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
the left side of the screen.
4 To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press
RETURN again, or select ‘Back’ from the menu
options on the left.
Create
Use this function to add an Original title to the Play List.
When you do this, the whole title is put into the Play List
(you can erase bits you don’t need later—see
Chapter Edit
(Chpt Edit)
on page 83).
The title appears in the Play List complete with the
chapter markers that appear in the Original. However, if
you add more chapter markers to the Original later, these
are not automatically copied over into the Play List title.
You can add up to 99 titles to the Play List.
VR mode
DVD
1/1
Chapter Edit
Back
Erase
Divide
Combine
Move
Undo
1 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
15:00 Wed11/12 Pr 5 LP
Title
1
Chapter
0h03m
2
Play List
Chapter 1
Divide Chapter
15:00 Wed11/12 Pr 5 LP
Title
1
Chapter
0h03m
1-1 0.02.12.00
Play Pause
Divide
Exit
DVD
Back
Erase
Divide
Combine
Move
Undo
Play List
VR mode
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 83 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Editing
08
84
En
1 Select ‘Create’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
2Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to select the
insertion point for the new title, then press ENTER.
If there are no titles in the Play List yet, this step does not
apply.
3 Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to select an
Original title to put into the Play List.
4 Press ENTER to add the title.
The new title appears in the updated Play List.
5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another location for a new
title.
Move
Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play
List titles.
1 Select ‘Move’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
2 Select the title you want to move, then press
ENTER.
3Select a new position in the Play List for the title,
then press ENTER.
After pressing
ENTER
, the new, updated Play List is
displayed.
4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to move.
Play List
1/1
Undo
DVD
Disc Navigator
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
1 2
Play List
1/1
Undo
DVD
ORG1
ORG4
ORG2 ORG3
Disc Navigator
12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Play List
1/1
Undo
DVD
Disc Navigator
1
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
2 3
VR mode
Play List
1/1
Undo
DVD
Disc Navigator
12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP
123
4
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Play List
1/1
Undo
DVD
Disc Navigator
123
4
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 84 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Editing 08
85
En
English
Divide
Use this command to split a title up into two new titles.
1 Select ‘Divide’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
2 Select the title that you want to divide, then
press ENTER.
3 Use the standard playback controls to find the
place you want to divide the title.
4With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide
the title at the current playback position.
5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options or select another title to divide.
Combine
Use this function to combine two adjacent Play List titles
into one.
1 Select ‘Combine’ from the Disc Navigator Play
List menu options.
2Highlight the bar divider between the two titles
you want to combine, then press ENTER.
After pressing
ENTER
, the new, updated Play List is
displayed.
3 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or continue combining more titles.
Erase All
This command erases all the titles from the Play List.
1Select ‘Erase All’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
2 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
Undo
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally
undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words,
you can undo the last three edits you made).
• Select ‘Undo’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
• You can’t undo anything after ejecting the disc from
the recorder or switching the recorder into standby.
• You can’t undo the following operations: initializing,
recording or finalizing a disc, locking and unlocking
titles.
• You can still undo edits after exiting the Disc
Navigator screen.
VR mode
Undo
DVD
Divide Title
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
Title 2
15:00 Wed11/12 Pr 5 LP
2-1 1.07.45.00
Play Pause
Play List
Divide
Cancel
VR mode
Play List
1/1
Undo
DVD
Disc Navigator
123
4
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Play List
1/1
Undo
DVD
Disc Navigator
123
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
VR mode
Play List
1/1
Undo
DVD
123
4
Disc Navigator
Erase all titles?
Yes No
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
VR mode
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 85 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Disc History
09
86
En
Chapter 9
Disc History
The Disc History screen lets you see how much recording space remains on the last 30 recordable DVD discs loaded.
It also displays information such as disc name, the first three title names, number of titles recorded, recording mode
and the lock status of the disc.
Using the Disc History
1 Press DISC HISTORY to display the Disc History
screen.
The most recently loaded disc appears at the top of the
list, with previously loaded discs below it. If there is a disc
loaded, it is shown in the list with a ‘disc in’ icon.
• The Disc History screen is also accessible from the
Home Menu.
2 Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to see
title information for other discs in the list.
• To remove a disc from the list, press
CLEAR
(you
can’t remove the currently loaded disc).
•You can see the available recording time for different
recording modes by pressing the
REC MODE
button.
3 To exit the Disc History screen, press HOME
MENU or DISC HISTORY.
Note
•When you initialize a DVD-RW disc or record a
DVD-R disc for the first time, the recorder
automatically names the disc
DISC **
(where ** is a
number from 1 to 99). You can rename the disc if you
want to (see
Input Disc Name
on page 89).
• When you change the display for the available
recording time using the
REC MODE
button, only the
display is changed; the actual recording mode is not
affected.
• The following discs appear in the Disc History list in
gray:
– Discs with no available recording space left
– Locked discs
– Discs that contain the maximum 99 titles and/or
999 chapters
– Discs recorded with a Line Input setting different to
the recorder’s current setting.
•When a Video mode disc is finalized, the information
for that disc disappears from the Disc History.
VR mode Video mode
Disc History
LP
DVD RemainDisc Name
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
Today's Football
Enjoy Golf!
Social dance Lesson
Titles
:
8
DVD-RW
Video
625System
News
Sport
Travel
Movie
Music
1h54m
2h35m
1h22m
0h30m
1h38m
1/2
Disc name
Disc lock indicatorRecorded Line
System of disc
Available
recording space
Recording time
available
Recording mode
Number of
titles on disc
Disc type and
recording mode
Title information
for the selected
disc
Disc loaded
Other discs
Selected disc
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 86 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The PhotoViewer 10
87
En
English
Chapter 10
The PhotoViewer
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on a CD-ROM/R/RW on your TV.
Playing a slideshow
1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘PhotoViewer’ to
display the PhotoViewer screen.
• The PhotoViewer is only accessible when a disc
containing JPEG files is loaded.
2Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to select
a folder from the folder list.
3 Press ENTER to see the images from the
highlighted folder in the thumbnail view area.
The first image file in the folder will be highlighted.
• To get back to the folder list, press
RETURN
.
4 Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to select a
thumbnail.
•Use the
and
buttons to display the previous/
next page of thumbnails.
5Press ENTER or
PLAY to start playing a
slideshow from the selected thumbnail.
•Use the
PREV
/
NEXT
buttons to display the
previous/next picture, or the
PAUSE
button to
pause the slideshow.
6 Press
STOP to return to the thumbnail view
area.
7To return to the folder view area, press RETURN.
• To exit the PhotoViewer, press
HOME MENU
.
Note
•Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there
are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still
possible to view them all using the Reload function
(see below).
• The time it takes for the recorder to load a file
increases with large file sizes.
• Pictures with an aspect ratio different to your TV
screen will appear with black bars top and bottom, or
either side (depending on the picture).
• If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that
the disc and file formats are compatible with this
recorder (see
JPEG file compatibility
on page 10).
Reloading files from a disc
If you have a disc with a very large number of files and/or
folders, you can still view all the images using the reload
function.
1 Use the
(cursor down) button to navigate to
the last entry in the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).
2 Press ENTER to load the next batch of up to 999
files/99 folders from the disc.
It will take a moment (at most a minute) to load in the
images.
PhotoViewer
1/2 1/3
01. 12/12
TUE
02. 13/12
WED
03. 14/12 THU
04. 15/12
FRI
05. 16/12
SAT
06. 17/12 SUN
07. 18/12
MON
08. 19/12
TUE
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
File
Date/Time Chair No. 2
10:00 12/05/2003
Size
1920 x 1440
Currently selected thumbnail
File information
Pages in file
view
Pages in
folder list
Currently selected
folder in folder list
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 87 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The PhotoViewer
10
88
En
Note
•You can press
HOME MENU
to exit the PhotoViewer
screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you
enter the PhotoViewer again, it will resume
reloading.)
Zooming the screen
During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion
of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move
the area of the picture displayed.
1 During a slideshow, use the CHANNEL + button
to zoom the picture.
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and
4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.
2Use the
///
(cursor buttons) to move the
zoomed area within the picture.
Rotating the screen
You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow
so you can always view pictures the right way up,
whichever way they were taken.
• During a slideshow, press ANGLE to rotate the
displayed picture clockwise by 90º.
Press
ANGLE
repeatedly to continue rotating the picture
in increments of 90º.
2x Zoom
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 88 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Disc Setup menu 11
89
En
English
Chapter 11
The Disc Setup menu
From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the
contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure,
initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is
accessed from the Home menu:
• Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
Basic settings
Input Disc Name
Use this to enter a name for the disc. This name appears
when you load the disc and when you display disc
information on-screen.
1 Select ‘Input Disc Name’ from the Basic options,
then ‘Next Screen’.
2Input a name for the disc up to 64 characters long
for a VR mode disc, or 32 for a Video mode disc.
• Use the
///
(cursor buttons) and
ENTER
to
select characters.
• Use the
/
buttons to change the cursor
position.
• Select
CAPS
or
small
to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the
CASE SELECTION
buttons (
/
).
• You can also use the
CLEAR
button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for 2 seconds to
delete the whole name). For other remote control key
shortcuts, see
Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name
on page 78.
•For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
Note
• You cannot input a name for a disc if the TV line
system of the disc is different to the current setting of
the recorder. See
Input Line System
on page 95 for
how to change the recorder’s setting.
Lock Disc
• Default setting:
Off
Set to
On
to prevent accidental recording, editing or
erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc
to make edits, select
Off
.
Important
•A locked disc can still be initialized (which will
completely erase the disc).
Note
•You cannot change the lock setting for a disc if the TV
line system of the disc is different to the current
setting of the recorder. See
Input Line System
on
page 95 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
Timer Recording
Disc History
PhotoViewer
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
DV Record
VR mode Video mode
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Input Disc Name
Lock Disc
Next Screen
Disc Setup
Input Disc Name
CAPS
small
OK Clear Space
A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? !
N
O
P
Q
R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ;
A A A A A A
Æ
ç E E E E I I I I #
2 3
´ µ ¶ ·
1
¿ `
D
N
O
O
O
O
O
ø
U U U U Y ß $
%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
<
=
>
_ &
£ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ® _ ˚
+ – / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { | } ~ ¡
c
a
–
o
–
<<
<<
1
/41
/23
/4
¸
DISC7
VR mode
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Input Disc Name
Lock Disc
On
Off
Disc Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 89 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Disc Setup menu
11
90
En
Initialize settings
You can initialize a DVD-RW disc for either VR mode
recording or Video mode recording. The first time you
load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatically
initialized for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto
Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see page 105).
The initialize menu here lets you reinitialize a disc, for
example if you want to change the recording format of
the disc. See
Initializing a DVD-RW disc
on page 61 for
detailed instructions.
HDD Initialize
When your DVD recorder is working without a problem
this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu.
However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for
some reason, you initialize the HDD to fix the problem.
Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it.
• Select ‘Initialize HDD’ from the disc Setup menu.
• Select ‘Start’ to initialize.
Finalize settings
Finalize
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
See
Playing your recordings on other DVD players
on
page 60 for detailed instructions.
Undo Finalize
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded
on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you
want to record more material or edit material already on
the disc.
You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs
which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If
when you load a disc the message
This disc cannot be
recorded. Undo the finalization
is displayed, use this
command to be able to record on the disc using this
recorder.
1From the Disc Setup menu, select ‘Finalize’, then
‘Undo Finalize’ from the finalize options.
2 Select ‘Start’.
Note
• You cannot finalize a disc or use the Undo Finalize
command if the TV line system of the disc is different
to the current setting of the recorder. See
Input Line
System
on page 95 for how to change the recorder’s
setting.
DVD-RW
HDD
Initialize Start
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Initialize HDD
Disc Setup
DVD-R DVD-RW
DVD-RW
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 90 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 12
91
En
English
Chapter 12
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
Using the Video/Audio Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc
playback, and for recording.
Setting the picture quality for TV and
external inputs
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality
settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external
input. There are several preset settings that suit various
sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets.
Choosing a preset
1 With the recorder stopped, press HOME MENU
and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
2 Select ‘Video Adjust’.
3 Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to
change the preset.
•Use the
INPUT SELECT
button to switch between the
built-in TV tuner and the external inputs.
• Use the
CHANNEL +/–
buttons to change the
channel of the built-in TV tuner.
There are 6 presets available:
•
Tuner
– suitable for general TV broadcasts
•
VCR
– suitable for video cassettes
•
LDP
– suitable for Laserdiscs
•
Memory1
– user preset 1
•
Memory2
– user preset 2
•
Memory3
– user preset 3
You can press
DISPLAY
to see the individual settings for
the current preset (
Tuner
,
VCR
or
LDP
).
4 Press ENTER to select the preset.
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings.
1 Follow
Choosing a preset
above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
2 Select ‘Detailed Settings’.
3 Select the picture quality setting you want to
adjust.
You can adjust the following settings:
•
3-D Y/C
– Adjusts the brightness/colour separation
(NTSC video only).
•
VNR
– Adjusts the amount of noise reduction applied
to the video signal.
•
Detail
– Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
•
White AGC
– Turn on for automatic white level
adjustment.
•
White Level
– Adjusts the intensity of white.
•
Black Level
– Adjusts the intensity of black.
•
Black Setup
– Corrects the standard reference black
level (NTSC video only).
•
Hue
– Adjusts overall balance between red and
green.
•
Chroma Level
– Adjusts how rich the colours
appear.
Timer Recording
Disc History
PhotoViewer
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
DV Record
Tuner
Detailed Settings
Pr 5
Memory1
Detailed Settings
Pr 5
Memory1
Off Max
Off
Detail
White AGC
Black Setup
Motion Still
3-D Y/C
VNR
Min Max
Min Max
White Level
Black Level
Pr 5
0 IRE
On
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 91 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
12
92
En
4Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to adjust
the currently selected picture quality setting.
5 When you have all the settings as you want
them, press HOME MENU to exit.
You can now use the preset for any other input or the
built-in TV tuner.
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press
ENTER
after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
Note
•When the DV input is selected, only
VNR
and
Detail
settings can be adjusted.
• When
White AGC
is
On
, the
White Level
setting
can’t be adjusted.
• The
3-D Y/C
and
Black Setup
settings apply only to
NTSC video input.
Setting the picture quality for disc
playback
This setting determines how the picture will look when
playing discs.
Choosing a preset
1 With a disc playing (or paused), press HOME
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
2 Select ‘Video Adjust’
3 Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to
change the setting.
There are 6 presets available:
•
TV(CRT)
– suitable for standard cathode-ray tube TVs
•
PDP
– suitable for plasma display screens
•
Professional
– suitable for professional monitors
•
Memory1
– user preset 1
•
Memory2
– user preset 2
•
Memory3
– user preset 3
You can press
DISPLAY
to see the individual settings for
the current preset (
TV(CRT)
,
PDP
or
Professional
).
4 Press ENTER to select the preset.
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.
1 Follow
Choosing a preset
above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
2 Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed
Settings’.
3 Select the picture quality setting you want to
adjust.
You can adjust the following settings:
•
YNR
– Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
•
CNR
– Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the C (colour) component.
•
QNR
– Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the block noise.
•
Detail
– Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
•
White Level
– Adjusts the intensity of white.
•
Black Level
– Adjusts the intensity of black.
•
Black Setup
– Corrects the standard reference black
level (NTSC video only).
•
Hue
– Adjusts overall balance between red and
green.
•
Chroma Level
– Adjusts how rich the colours
appear.
4Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to adjust
the currently selected picture quality setting.
5 When you have all the settings as you want
them, press HOME MENU to exit.
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press
ENTER
after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
TV(CRT)
Detailed Settings
Memory1
Detailed Settings
Off Max
Off Max
Off Max
YNR
CNR
QNR
Off Max
Detail
Min Max
Min Max
White Level
Black Level
Black Setup
Memory1
0 IRE
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 92 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 12
93
En
English
Note
• The
Black Setup
setting applies only when playing
NTSC discs.
Audio DRC
• Default setting:
Off
When watching Dolby Digital soundtracks at low volume,
it’s easy to lose low level sounds completely—including
some of the dialog. Switching on Audio DRC (Dynamic
Range Control) can help by bringing up the low level
sounds, while controlling high level peaks.
1 During playback or when paused, press HOME
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
2 Select ‘Audio Adjust’.
3 Select ‘Audio DRC’.
4Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to adjust
DRC from ‘Off‘ to ‘Max’.
Exactly how much difference you can hear between the
settings will depend on the material.
Remember
•Audio DRC is not effective when listening to a disc via
the digital output when
Dolby Digital Out
is set to
Dolby Digital
. In this case adjust the dynamic range
from your AV amplifier/receiver.
Virtual Surround
• Default setting:
Off
Switch on Virtual Surround to enjoy surround sound
effects from just two speakers.
When playing any Dolby Digital encoded material, SRS
TruSurround produces a deep, cinema-like sound space
from any pair of speakers.
SRS TruSurround is licenced from SRS Labs and
certified by Dolby Laboratories for Virtual Dolby
technology.
1 During playback or when paused, press HOME
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
2 Select ‘Audio Adjust’.
3 Select ‘Virtual Surround’.
4 Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to
change the setting.
Note
•Virtual Surround has no effect on 96 kHz Linear PCM
audio, DTS audio and audio CDs.
•You can hear the Virtual Surround effect through the
analog outputs and the DV output. The Virtual
Surround setting has no effect on the rear panel
optical digital output.
• TruSurround, SRS and the symbol are
trademarks of SRS Labs., Inc. TruSurround technology
in incorporated under license from SRS Labs., Inc.
Off Max
Virtual Surround
Audio DRC
Off
Audio Adjust
Max
Virtual Surround
Audio DRC
Off
Audio Adjust
Off
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 93 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Initial Setup menu
13
94
En
Chapter 13
The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various
recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.
• Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.
• Some settings can only be changed when the
recorder is stopped. During playback these settings
are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.
• Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are
exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.
Basic settings
Clock Setting
The date (day, month, year) and time must be set before
you can use any of the timer recording features.
The clock can be set automatically if there is a broadcast
station transmitting clock signals, or manually.
Select
Auto
to set the clock automatically or
Manual
to
display the clock setting screen.
• Auto clock setting
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together
with the program. This recorder can use these
signals to set the clock automatically.
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number
that broadcasts a clock signal, then move the
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.
If the time could not be set automatically, press
RETURN
to go back to the previous screen and select
Manual
.
• Manual clock setting
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time
signals, you can set the clock manually:
Set your time zone.
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative
to GMT.
Move the cursor down and select ‘On’ for
summer time if you are currently on summer
time, then press ENTER.
Timer Recording
Disc History
PhotoViewer
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
DV Record
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
Auto
Manual
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
Clock Setting
Auto Clock Setting
Date
Time
Clock Set CH
Pr 1
Initial Setup
Start
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
Clock Setting
Manual Clock Setting
Time Zone
Summer Time
Off
1/2
Austria
Vienna
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
Clock Setting
On
Austria
Vienna
Manual Clock Setting
Time Zone
Summer Time
1/2
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 94 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Initial Setup menu 13
95
En
English
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then
press ENTER to make all the settings.
Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to change
the value in the highlighted field.
Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to move
from one field to another.
Input Line System
• Default setting:
625System
For standard PAL or SECAM recording, leave the input
line system to
625System
. When recording an NTSC or
PAL–60 signal through an external input, change to
525System
.
Note
• When the current input is a built-in tuner channel
preset, changing the input line system will usually
also affect the input line system of the
AV2/(INPUT
1/DECODER)
input. However if the
AV2/L1 In
setting
is set to
Decoder
(see
AV2/L1 In
on page 99), then the
L2 input is affected instead.
• If when this setting is changed, the screen goes
blank (due to incompatibility with your TV), you can
switch back by pressing and holding
STOP REC
then pressing
HDD/DVD
while the recorder is
stopped.
• When you switch the Line Input System setting the
Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the
STOP REC
and
HDD/DVD
buttons as described
above, there is no confirmation, so please use with
care.
•You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems
on the same disc.
• When you change this setting, the
Input Colour
System
setting also changes (see
Input Colour
System
on page 99).
On Screen Display
• Default setting:
On
On the default setting, the recorder shows on-screen
operation displays (
Play, Stop
and so on). Change to
Off
to hide these displays.
Front Panel Display
• Default setting:
On
On the default setting, the time is shown in the front
panel display when the recorder is in standby. Switch to
Off
to have the front panel display switch off completely
when in standby.
Note
• When set to
Off
, the display still lights dimly in
standby when setting a timer recording, or during
Auto Start Recording.
Power Save
• Default setting:
Off
When set to
Off
, signals arriving at the
ANTENNA IN
terminal and at the
AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV
connector are passed through to the
ANTENNA OUT
terminal and to the
AV1(RGB)-TV
AV connector,
respectively, when the recorder is in standby.
You can cut the standby power consumption of the
recorder by turning off the through function for one or
both terminals:
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
Clock Setting
Manual Clock Setting 2/2
Date
Time
Time Zone
Summer Time
01 01 2003
WED
00 00
Austria
Vienna
On
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
525System
625System
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
On
Off
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
On
Off
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
Mode1
Mode2
Off
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 95 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Initial Setup menu
13
96
En
•
Mode1
– Through function only for the antenna
terminal
•
Mode2
– No through function
•
Off
– Through function for both antenna terminal
and AV connector
Remote Control Set
• Default setting:
Recorder1
You only need to set this if you are using more than one
Pioneer DVD recorder in the same room.
So that each remote control operates only its own
recorder, make this setting different for each recorder
and remote in the room.
There are three different recorder IDs. When set to
Recorder2
or
Recorder3
, the remote control mode is
shown in the front panel display.
Note that as soon as you change the recorder ID, the
remote becomes inoperative until you change the remote
to the same ID.
To set the remote, press and hold
RETURN
and a number
button (
1
,
2
or
3
) until the indicator on the remote lights.
Setup Navigator
• Default setting:
n/a
The Setup Navigator appears automatically when you
switch on the recorder for the first time (or after resetting
the recorder). It is also available from the Initial Settings
menu should you need it at any other time.
See also
Switching on and setting up
on page 25.
Tuner settings
Auto Channel Setting : Auto Scan
This recorder has a built-in TV tuner for recording PAL B/
G, PAL I, SECAM L and SECAM D/K TV programs off the
air or from analog cable TV. We recommend that you first
use the Auto Channel Setting described here to tune into
the channels in your area, then if there are any unwanted
channels, you can disable them using Channel Skip
(described below).
1Choose ‘Tuner’ from the Initial Setup menu, then
‘Auto Channel Setting’, then ‘Auto Scan’.
2 Select your country then press ENTER to start
tuning.
• You can cancel before auto tuning has finished by
pressing
ENTER
again.
After auto scanning has finished, the channel mapping
screen appears showing which channels have been
assigned to which program numbers.
Use the
PREV/NEXT
buttons to display the previous/next
page.
3 Press HOME MENU to exit this screen.
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
Recorder1
Recorder2
Recorder3
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Set
Setup Navigator
Start
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
ShowView CH Setting
Auto Scan
Download from TV
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
ShowView CH Setting
Auto Channel Setting
Auto Channel Setting
Country
Austria
Initial Setup
Pr System CH
Name
1 B/G 26
2 B/G 33
3 B/G 23
4 B/G 30
5 B/G 37
6 B/G 35
7 B/G 39
8 B/G 26
Pr System CH
Name
9 B/G 9
10 B/G 25
11 B/G 11
12 B/G 12
13 B/G 13
14 B/G 14
15 B/G 15
16 B/G 16
Initial Setup
1/7
Channel Mapping
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 96 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Initial Setup menu 13
97
En
English
Note
• You can fine-tune individual stations using the
Manual CH Setting
feature. See
Manual CH Setting
below for how to use this.
Auto Channel Setting : Download from TV
If you connected this recorder to your TV using the
AV1(RGB)-TV
AV connector, and if your TV supports this
function, you can download all the channels that your TV
is tuned to. Check your TV’s instruction manual for more
details.
1 Choose ‘Download from TV’.
2 Select your country.
3 Press ENTER to start downloading.
After downloading has finished, the channel mapping
screen appears showing which channels have been
assigned to which program numbers.
Tip
• If the channel tuning information is updated in the
TV, the recorder will automatically download the new
information.
Manual CH Setting
The channel skip function lets you skip channels where
there is no station so that as you change channels using
the
CHANNEL +/–
buttons, number buttons or the front
panel
SMART JOG
, you only change to channels that
have a station.
The manual tuning function allows you to manually tune
to stations, should you need to.
1 Select ‘Manual CH Setting’, then ‘Next Screen’.
Press
ENTER
to go to the country setting screen.
2 Select your country.
3Press ENTER to go to the manual channel setting
screen.
• Use the
CHANNEL +/–
buttons, number buttons or
the
SMART JOG
on the front panel to change
channels.
From this screen there are eight parameters you can set:
•
Skip
– If you want to skip the displayed channel
(because there is no station assigned to that
channel), change the
Skip
setting to
On
.
•
CH System
– Set the channel system used in your
area or region.
•
Channel
– Change the channel number assigned to
the current preset.
•
AFT
(Auto Fine Tune) – When set to
On
, the station is
automatically tuned; set to
Off
to manually fine tune
(see below).
•
Level
– Set the AFT level (see above).
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
ShowView CH Setting
Auto Scan
Download from TV
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
ShowView CH Setting
Auto Channel Setting
Auto Channel Setting
Country
Austria
Initial Setup
Downloading
Cancel
Pr 5
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
ShowView CH Setting
Next Screen
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
ShowView CH Setting
Manual Channel Setting
Manual Channel Setting
Country
Austria
Initial Setup
OffSkip
CH System
Channel
AFT
Level
Sound System
Name
Decoder
Western Euro
2
On
B/G
Off
Pr 1
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 97 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Initial Setup menu
13
98
En
•
Sound System
– Set the sound system used for the
current channel.
•
Name
– Move the cursor right then input a name for
the current station, (up to five characters) then press
ENTER
.
•
Decoder
– If the current channel is scrambled,
requiring a decoder connected to the
AV2/(INPUT 1/
DECODER)
connector, set this to
On
. (See also
AV2/
L1 In
on page 99.)
Channel Swapping
The preset swap feature lets you swap the channel
assignments of different programs. This is so that you
can group together station presets which naturally go
together.
1 Select ‘Channel Swapping’.
2 Select ‘Next Screen’ to go to the swap presets
screen.
3Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to select
a preset station to swap.
• Use the
PREV/NEXT
buttons to display the previous/
next page.
4 Press
(cursor right), then select a preset
station to swap with the first preset.
5 Press ENTER to swap the presets.
6 If you want to swap more presets, press
(cursor left), then repeats steps 3 to 5.
7 Press HOME MENU to finish and exit.
ShowView CH Setting
• Default setting:
n/a
Guide channels are used by the ShowView system so that
the channel number specified in the ShowView
programming numbers can be guaranteed to
correspond to the correct station.
1 Select ‘ShowView CH Setting’, then ‘Next
Screen’.
2Assign channel numbers to the guide channels as
necessary.
Look in your TV guide to see which channel numbers
should be assigned to which guide channels.
• Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons to change
the guide channel for setting.
• Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to change
the channel number.
•Use the
PREV / NEXT
button to display the previous/
next 10 guide channels.
3To return to the Initial Setup menu, press ENTER.
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
ShowView CH Setting
Next Screen
Initial Setup
11
Pr System CH
Name
1 B/G CC40
2 B/G 2
3 B/G 3
4 B/G 4
5 B/G 5
6 B/G 6
Pr System CH
Name
1 B/G CC40
2 B/G 2
3 B/G 3
4 B/G 4
5 B/G 5
6 B/G 6
[1] 1/17 [2] 1/17
Swap Preset
Initial Setup
51
Pr System CH
Name
1 B/G CC40
2 B/G 2
3 B/G 3
4 B/G 4
5 B/G 5
6 B/G 6
Pr System CH
Name
1 B/G CC40
2 B/G 2
3 B/G 3
4 B/G 4
5 B/G 5
6 B/G 6
[1] 1/17 [2] 1/17
Swap Preset
Initial Setup
53
Pr System CH
Name
1 B/G CC40
2 B/G 2
3 B/G 3
4 B/G 4
5 B/G 5
6 B/G 6
Pr System CH
Name
1 B/G CC40
2 B/G 2
3 B/G 3
4 B/G 4
5 B/G 5
6 B/G 6
[1] 1/17 [2] 1/17
Swap Preset
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
ShowView CH Setting
Next Screen
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
ShowView CH Setting
ShowView CH Setting
ShowView CH Setting
Guide Preset Guide Preset
1/26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Pr 4
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 98 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Initial Setup menu 13
99
En
English
Video In / Out settings
Input Colour System
• Default setting:
Auto
On the default setting, the recorder automatically detects
whether the video signal from the built-in tuner or from
one of the external inputs is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or
PAL–60. You may, however, occasionally need to set it
manually if the picture is not displayed properly.
1 Select ‘Input Colour System’, then ‘Next Screen’.
2 Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons or the INPUT
SELECT button to switch between the built-in tuner
and the external inputs.
3 Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to
change the input colour system for the current input
or built-in tuner.
• The available settings depend on the Input Line
System setting (see
Input Line System
on page 95).
The table below shows the different options available.
AV1 Out
• Default setting:
Video
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to your TV using the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART AV
connector.
Important
• If you make a setting here that is incompatible with
your TV, the TV may not display any picture at all. If
this happens either switch everything off and
reconnect to the TV using either the supplied video
cable, or an S-video cable (see
Using the S-video
output
on page 15 for more on this), or reset the
recorder (see
Resetting the recorder
on page 109 for
how to do this).
•
Video
– Compatible with all TVs, but lowest quality of
the three AV settings.
•
S-Video
– Almost the same quality as RGB, but can
give better results if you are using a long SCART
cable.
•
RGB
– If your TV is compatible, this setting gives the
best picture quality.
AV2/L1 In
• Default setting:
Video
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to another component using the AV2/(INPUT 1/
DECODER) AV connector.
The
AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER)
connector input can be
set to one of the following settings:
•
Video
– Sets the input signal type to composite
video.
•
S-Video
– Sets the input signal type to S-video.
Input Line System Built-in tuner External input
625 System Auto Auto
PAL PAL
SECAM SECAM
525 System
n/a
Auto
3.58 NTSC
PAL–60
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Input Colour System
AV1 Out
AV2/L1 In
NTSC on PAL TV
Next Screen
Initial Setup
Auto
Pr 5
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Input Colour System
AV1 Out
AV2/L1 In
NTSC on PAL TV
Video
S-Video
RGB
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Input Colour System
AV1 Out
AV2/L1 In
NTSC on PAL TV
Video
S-Video
Decorder
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 99 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Initial Setup menu
13
100
En
•
Decoder
– Use this setting if you are using a decoder
connected to the
AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER)
input.
(For scrambled channels, make sure that the manual
channel
Decoder
setting is set to
On
—see also
Manual CH Setting
on page 97).
NTSC on PAL TV
• Default setting:
On
When set to
On
, NTSC discs (from the U.S., for example)
will play correctly on a PAL-only TV. Change to
Off
if your
TV is already NTSC-compatible.
Depending on this setting and the Input Line System
setting (see
Input Line System
on page 95), the signal
format output when the recorder is stopped varies as
shown in the table below.
Note
• Many recent PAL TVs are capable of correctly
displaying NTSC pictures without the need for this
setting. Check the manual that came with your TV if
you’re not sure whether yours has this feature.
Audio In settings
NICAM Select
• Default setting:
NICAM
If you want to record the non-NICAM audio in a TV
broadcast, select
Regular Audio
, otherwise set to
NICAM
. (When set to
NICAM
, you can still select
Regular Audio
using the
AUDIO
button. See
Changing
audio channels
on page 29.)
Tuner Level
• Default setting:
Normal
Set to
Compression
if the audio level from the built-in
tuner is excessively high causing distortion.
External Audio
• Default setting:
Stereo
If the external source is standard stereo, leave set to
Stereo
. If each channel carries a separate soundtrack,
change to
Bilingual
.
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio
subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder
whether the audio is stereo or bilingual. This has priority
over the setting you make here.
Input Line System NTSC on PAL
TV
Output when
stopped
625 System Off PAL
On PAL
525 System Off NTSC
On PAL–60
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Input Colour System
AV1 Out
AV2/L1 In
NTSC on PAL TV
On
Off
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
Input Level (L3)
NICAM
Regular Audio
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
Input Level (L3)
Normal
Compression
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
Input Level (L3)
Stereo
Bilingual
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 100 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Initial Setup menu 13
101
En
English
Bilingual Recording
• Default setting:
A/L
When recording a bilingual source from an external input
in Video mode or VR mode set to
FINE/MN32
, or to the
HDD, you can choose to record either the
A/L
(left), or
the
B/R
(right) audio channel.
Note
• If you’re recording in VR mode (except when set to
FINE/MN32
), both channels will be recorded and you
can switch them as you like on playback.
DV Input
• Default setting:
Stereo1
You need to set this if you have a camcorder using 32kHz/
12-bit sound connected to the front panel
DV IN/OUT
jack.
Some digital camcorders have two stereo tracks for
audio. One is recorded at the time of shooting; the other
is for overdubbing after shooting.
On the
Stereo1
setting, the sound that was recorded
while shooting is used. On the
Stereo2
setting, the
overdubbed sound is used. You can also choose a
Mix
setting of 25%, 50% or 75% for the Stereo 1 with a
corresponding Stereo 2 setting of 75%, 50% or 25%.
Input Level (L1 / L2 / L3)
• Default setting:
0dB
You can adjust the gain of the audio from each external
input individually, from
–6dB
to
+6dB
in steps of 3 dB to
optimize the recorded audio level.
Audio Out settings
Digital Out
• Default setting:
On
If at any time you need to switch off the digital audio
output, set this to
Off
, otherwise leave it
On
.
Note
•When set to
Off
, all the other
Audio Out
settings are
grayed out and can’t be set.
Dolby Digital Out
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to an AV amplifier (or other component) using the
digital output.
• Default setting:
Dolby Digital
If your AV receiver (or other connected component) is
Dolby Digital compatible, set to
Dolby Digital
, otherwise
set to
Dolby Digital
PCM
. Check the manual that
came with the connected component if you’re unsure
whether it is Dolby Digital compatible.
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
Input Level (L3)
A/L
B/R
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
Input Level (L3)
Stereo1
Stereo2
Mix (Stereo1: 75%)
Mix (Stereo1: 50%)
Mix (Stereo1: 25%)
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
Input Level (L3)
Initial Setup
+6dB
+3dB
0dB
–3dB
–6dB
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Digital Out
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
On
Off
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Digital Out
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital PCM
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 101 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Initial Setup menu
13
102
En
DTS Out
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to an AV amplifier (or other component) using the
digital output.
• Default setting:
On
If your AV receiver (or other connected component) has a
built-in DTS decoder, set to
On
, otherwise set to
Off
.
Check the manual that came with the connected
component if you’re unsure whether it is DTS
compatible.
Important
•If you set to
On
with a non-DTS compatible amplifier,
noise will be output when you play a DTS disc.
• When set to
On
, there is no analog audio output
when playing a DTS DVD-Video disc.
• When playing a DTS audio CD (even when
DTS Out
is
Off
), noise is output from the analog outputs.
Do
not play this through your amplifier and speakers.
• When playing a DTS audio CD, make sure that
Stereo
is selected using the
AUDIO
button. See
Switching DVD soundtracks
on page 45.
96kHz PCM Out
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to an AV amplifier (or other component) using the
digital output.
• Default setting:
96kHz
48kHz
If your AV receiver (or other connected component) is
compatible with high sampling rate audio (88.2 / 96 kHz),
set to
96kHz
, otherwise set to
96kHz
48kHz
. Check
the manual that came with the connected component if
you’re unsure whether it is compatible with high
sampling rate audio.
MPEG Out
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to an AV amplifier (or other component) using the
digital output.
• Default setting:
MPEG
PCM
If your AV receiver (or other connected component) is
MPEG audio compatible, set to
MPEG
, otherwise set to
MPEG
PCM
. Check the manual that came with the
connected component if you’re unsure whether it is
MPEG compatible.
Language settings
OSD Language
• Default setting:
English
This sets the language of the on-screen menus and
displays.
Audio Language
• Default setting:
English
This setting is your preferred audio language for DVD
discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a
disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc in that
language (although this depends on the
Auto Language
setting—see
Auto Language
on page 103).
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Digital Out
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
On
Off
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Digital Out
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
96kHz 48kHz
96kHz
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Digital Out
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
MPEG
MPEG PCM
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
OSD Language
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
English
Français
Deutsch
Italiano
Español
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
OSD Language
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Other
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 102 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Initial Setup menu 13
103
En
English
Choose
Other
if you want to specify a language other
than those listed (see
Selecting ‘Other’ languages
on
page 104).
Tip
• You can switch between the languages recorded on
a DVD disc any time during playback using the
AUDIO
button. (This does not affect this setting.)
Subtitle Language
• Default setting:
English
This setting is your preferred subtitle language for DVD
discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a
disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc with those
subtitles (although this depends on the
Auto Language
setting—see
Auto Language
on page 103).
Choose
Other
if you want to specify a language other
than those listed (see
Selecting ‘Other’ languages
on
page 104).
Tip
•You can change or switch off the subtitles on a DVD
disc any time during playback using the
SUBTITLE
button. (This does not affect this setting.)
Auto Language
• Default setting:
On
When set to
On
, the recorder selects the default audio
language on a DVD disc (French dialog for a French
movie, for example), and displays subtitles in your
preferred subtitle language only if that is set to
something different. In other words, movies in your native
language won’t have any subtitles, while foreign
language movies will be shown with subtitles.
Set to
Off
to have the recorder play discs strictly
according to your
Audio Language
and
Subtitle
Language
settings.
For
Auto Language
to work, the
Audio Language
and
Subtitle Language
settings must be the same—see
Audio Language
on page 102 and
Subtitle Language
on
page 103.
Note
• Even when set to
On
, Auto Language may not work
with some discs. In this case, set the audio and
subtitle languages using the
AUDIO
and
SUBTITLE
buttons.
Tip
•You can still switch audio and subtitle languages on
playback using the
AUDIO
and
SUBTITLE
buttons.
DVD Menu Language
• Default setting:
w/Subtitle Language
Some multilingual discs have disc menus in several
languages. This setting specifies in which language the
disc menus should appear. Leave on the default setting
for menus to appear in the same language as your
Subtitle Language
—see
Subtitle Language
on page 103.
Choose
Other
if you want to specify a language other
than those listed (see
Selecting ‘Other’ languages
on
page 104).
Subtitle Display
• Default setting:
On
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
OSD Language
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Other
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
OSD Language
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
On
Off
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
OSD Language
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
w/Subtitle Language
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Other
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
OSD Language
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
On
Off
Assist Subtitle
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 103 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Initial Setup menu
13
104
En
When set to
On
, the recorder displays subtitles
according to the
Subtitle Language
and
Auto
Language
settings. Set to
Off
to switch subtitles off
altogether (although you may find that some discs
override this setting). Set to
Assist Subtitle
to have the
recorder display the extra assistive subtitles recorded on
to some DVD discs.
Selecting ‘Other’ languages
1 Select ‘Other’ from the language list.
This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu
Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language.
2 Select the language you want.
•Select by language name: Use the
/
(cursor left/
right) buttons to change the language.
•Select by code number: Press
(cursor down) then
use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit language
code.
See
Language code list
on page 116 for a list of available
languages and corresponding codes.
3 Press ENTER to confirm and exit the screen.
Recording settings
Manual Recording
• Default setting:
Off
On the default setting there are four different recording
time/picture quality settings,
FINE
,
SP
,
LP
and
EP
. If you
want to create a custom setting, switch on Manual
Recording and select one of the 32 manual settings.
When recording, you can select your Manual Recording
setting using the
REC MODE
button.
1 Select ‘On (go to setup)’ to display the manual
recording setting screen.
2 Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to
change the manual recording level.
• You can also use the
and
buttons to cycle
between levels
MN1
,
MN9
,
MN21
and
MN32
.
• To preview the recording quality, press
(cursor
down) and select
Preview
. To return to the level
adjust screen, press
ENTER
.
3 Press ENTER to set the manual recording level
and return to the menu screen.
Note
•The preset picture quality settings correspond to the
following manual settings:
FINE
:
MN32
,
SP
:
MN21
,
LP
:
MN9
,
EP
:
MN1
.
• See page
Manual recording modes
on page 115 for
detailed information on the manual recording levels.
Optimized Rec
• Default setting:
Off
On the default setting, if a timer program (standard, easy
or ShowView programming system) is set but there isn’t
enough space on the disc at the recording quality set, the
recording will start, but it will be cut off when the disc is
full. Set
Optimized Rec
to
On
to have the recorder
automatically adjust the recording quality to fit the
available disc space.
Note
• You may notice a reduction in picture quality if the
recorder has to fit a lot of extra material into the
remaining time available on the disc.
•If, even on recording level
MN
1
, there is insufficient
space available on the disc, the recording is made at
level
MN
1
but recording will stop once the disc is
full.
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
OSD Language
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
DVD Menu Language
DVD Menu Language
English
0514
Language
Number
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
Navi Mark
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
On (go to setup)
Off
Initial Setup
Pr 5
DVD Remain 2h00m HDD Remain 2h33m
MN 9 (4h00m/DVD) 2.60Mbps
EP LP SP FINE
Preview
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On
Off
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
Navi Mark
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 104 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Initial Setup menu 13
105
En
English
• Optimized Recording only compensates for the first
(earliest starting) timer program if more than one has
been set.
• Optimized recording works only with DVD
recordings.
• Optimized recording can’t be used together with
VPS/PDC.
Navi Mark
• Default setting:
0 seconds
In the Disc Navigator, each title is shown with a still
frame picture to remind you what it is. This setting lets
you decide the default still frame. The default setting of
0
seconds
takes the first frame of the title, but you can also
set it to
30 seconds
or
3 minutes
into the title (if the title
is shorter than the setting, then the first frame is used).
Auto Chapter (Video)
• Default setting:
10 minutes
When recording in Video mode, a new chapter is started
every 10 minutes on the default setting. You can change
this interval to
15 minutes
, or switch off automatic
chapter marking altogether with the
No Separation
setting.
Frame Accurate
• Default setting:
Off
When Frame Accurate setting is
Off
, exact frame
accuracy is traded for high-speed copying when
recording a Copy List. Switch Frame Accurate
On
to
preserve the accuracy of the Copy List. However, copying
some edited Video mode titles will be done in real time.
Important
•When you change this setting the Copy List is erased.
Make sure it is set how you want it before you start
putting together a Copy List.
• The Frame Accurate setting has no effect on the
actual video content stored on the HDD.
DVD-RW Auto Init.
• Default setting:
VR Mode
When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc the recorder
automatically initializes it for recording. You can set it to
initialize the disc for
VR mode
or
Video mode
recording.
Playback settings
TV Screen Size
• Default setting:
4:3 (Letter Box)
If you have a widescreen TV, select the
16:9
setting—
widescreen DVD software is then shown using the full
screen area. When playing software recorded in
conventional (4:3) format, the settings on your TV will
determine how the material is presented—see the
manual that came with your TV for details on what
options are available.
If you have a conventional TV, choose either
4:3 (Letter
Box)
or
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
. In Letter Box mode,
widescreen software is shown with black bars at the top
and bottom of the screen. Pan & Scan chops the sides off
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
0 seconds
30 seconds
3 minutes
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
Navi Mark
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
No Separation
10 minutes
15 minutes
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
Navi Mark
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On
Off
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
Navi Mark
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
VR Mode
Video Mode
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
Navi Mark
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
16:9
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 105 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Initial Setup menu
13
106
En
widescreen material to make it fit the 4:3 screen (so even
though the picture looks larger on the screen, you’re
actually seeing less of the movie). See
Screen sizes and
disc formats
on page 110 for more information.
Still Picture
• Default setting:
Auto
The recorder uses one of two processes when displaying
a still frame from a DVD disc. The default
Auto
setting
automatically chooses the best setting each time.
•
Field
– produces a stable, generally shake-free
image.
•
Frame
– produces a sharper image, but more prone
to shake than field stills.
Frame Search
• Default setting:
Off
On the default setting, the frame number is not displayed
when a DVD disc is paused, and the search by frame
number feature is not available. You can switch these
features on by changing this setting to
On
.
Seamless Playback
• Default setting:
Off
During playback of a VR mode Play List, you may notice
momentary interruption in the picture at edited points.
The Seamless Playback feature lets you trade-off
accuracy of the edit points for more seamless playback.
When switched
On
, you may notice that the edit points
are a few frames earlier or later than you set.
Parental Lock
• Default level:
Off
• Default password:
none
• Default Country code:
us (2119)
Some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If
the recorder is set to a lower level than the disc, it will
require you to enter a password before the disc will play.
This gives you some control about what your children
watch on your DVD recorder.
Some discs also support the Country code feature. The
recorder does not play certain scenes on these discs
depending on the Country code you set.
Before you can set the Parental Lock level or the Country
code you must set a password. As the password owner
you can change the Parental Lock level or Country code
whenever you like. You can also change the password.
Note
•Not all discs that you may consider inappropriate for
your children use the Parental Lock feature. These
discs will always play without requiring the password
first.
•If you forget the password, you can reset the recorder
to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder
on
page 109), then set a new password.
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Field
Frame
Auto
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
On
Off
Initial Setup
VR mode HDD
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
On
Off
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 106 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Initial Setup menu 13
107
En
English
Parental Lock : Set Password
The password you set will enable you to change the
Parental Lock level and Country code setting. It is also the
password that you will need to enter if you want to play a
disc with a parental lock level higher than the recorder.
1 Select ‘Set Password’.
2 Use the number buttons to input a four-digit
password.
3 Press ENTER to set the password.
Parental Lock : Change Password
To change your password, confirm your existing
password then enter a new one.
1 Select ‘Change Password’.
2 Use the number buttons to enter your existing
password.
3Press ENTER.
4 Enter a new password.
5Press ENTER.
Parental Lock : Change Level
1 Select ‘Change Level’.
2 Use number buttons to enter your password,
then press ENTER.
3Use the
/
(cursor left/right) buttons to select
a new parental lock level.
4 Press ENTER to set the new Parental Lock level.
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Set Password
Change Level
Country Code
Initial Setup
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Parental Lock
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Set Password
12 3 4
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Change Password
Change Level
Country Code
Initial Setup
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Parental Lock
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Change Password
Current Password
New Password
12 3 4
Initial Setup
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Parental Lock
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Change Password
Current Password
New Password
12 3 4
5678
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Change Password
Change Level
Country Code
Initial Setup
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Parental Lock
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Parental Lock : Change Level
Password
Off
12 3 4
Initial Setup
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Parental Lock
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Parental Lock : Change Level
Password
Off
12 3 4
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 107 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
The Initial Setup menu
13
108
En
Parental Lock : Country Code
You may also want to refer to the
Country code list
on
page 116.
1 Select ‘Country Code’.
2 Use number buttons to enter your password,
then press ENTER.
3 Select a Country code.
There are two ways you can do this.
•Select by code letter: Use
/
(cursor left/right) to
change the country code.
•Select by code number: Press
(cursor down)
then
use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit country
code (you can find the
Country code list
on page 116.)
4 Press ENTER to set the new Country code.
Note
•Changing the country code does not take effect until
the next disc is loaded (or the current disc is
reloaded).
Angle Indicator
• Default setting:
On
On the default setting, when playing a DVD-Video disc
that features multi-angle scenes, an icon appears on-
screen during the parts of the disc where angle switching
is available. Change to
Off
to hide the on-screen
indicator.
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Change Password
Change Level
Country Code
Initial Setup
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Parental Lock
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Parental Lock: Country Code
Password
Code
Number
us
12 3 4
21 1 9
Initial Setup
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Parental Lock
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Parental Lock: Country Code
Password
Code
Number
12 3 4
Initial Setup
us
21 1 9
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Parental Lock
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Parental Lock: Country Code
Password
Code
Number
12 3 4
Initial Setup
us
21 1 9
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Frame Search
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
On
Off
Initial Setup
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 108 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information 14
109
En
English
Chapter 14
Additional information
Resetting the recorder
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory
settings.
1 Make sure that the recorder is on.
2 Press and hold
STOP and press
STANDBY/
ON.
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.
Setting up the remote to control your
TV
You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be
able to use this feature you first have to program the
remote with a maker code from the table below.
1 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then
enter the maker code for your TV.
The LED indicator on the remote controls lights.
See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is
more than one code given for your make, input the first
one in the list.
•If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the
table below, you will not be able to use this remote to
control your TV.
2 Press
TV to check that the remote works with
your TV.
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/
off. If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your
maker, repeat step
1
with a new code.
Using the TV remote control buttons
The table below shows how to use this remote control
with your TV.
Button What it does
TV
Press to switch the TV on/off (standby)
INPUT SELECT
Press to change the TV’s video input
TV VOLUME
Use to adjust the TV volume
TV CHANNEL
Use to change TV channels
Maker Code
Alba 66
Bush 76
Finlux 84
Fisher 61, 65
Fujitsu 77
Funai 67
Goldstar 79
Grandiente 87
Grundig 51, 82
Hitachi 56, 60, 83, 86
ITT 70
Mitsubishi 59
Nokia 53, 81
Panasonic 58, 72
Philips 57, 85
Pioneer 50, 80
RCA 68
Salora 71
Samsung 73, 75
Sanyo 74
Sei 78
Sharp 52
Sony 54
Tandy 69
Telefunken 64
Thomson 62
Toshiba 55
Victor 63
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 109 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information
14
110
En
Screen sizes and disc formats
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting Appearance
16:9 4:3 (Letter Box)
The program is shown in
widescreen with black bars at
the top and bottom of the
screen.
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The sides of the program are
cropped so that the picture
fills the whole screen.
4:3 16:9
The program appears
squashed. Set to either
4:3
(Letter Box)
or
4:3 (Pan &
Scan)
.
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The program is presented
correctly on either setting.
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting Appearance
16:9 16:9
The program is presented in
widescreen.
4:3 16:9
Your TV will determine how the
picture is presented—check
the manual that came with the
TV for details.
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 110 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information 14
111
En
English
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this
component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the
other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the
points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
General
Problem Remedy
The disc is automatically ejected
after closing the disc tray
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 118).
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder (page 120).
No picture
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 12).
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV receiver is set to the correct input.
Can’t play a disc
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 118).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so
for the condensation to evaporate.
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System
different to the current recorder setting.
All settings are reset
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on,
all the settings will be lost.
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the
power cord.
Screen goes blank and controls are
inoperative
• Press
STOP
then restart playback.
Remote control does not work
• If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the
CONTROL
IN
jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 12).
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 96). (When
the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to 1.)
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 8).
• Replace the batteries (page 8).
No sound or sound is distorted
• Make sure that the amplifier/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the
volume turned up.
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning (even
forwards at regular play speed) or slow motion play. Press
PLAY
to resume
regular playback
• DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or
DTS compatible amplifier/receiver. If you have connected a suitable decoder, also
make sure that the
Initial Setup > Audio Out > DTS Output
setting is
On
.
• Some 96kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case,
switch the input of your amplifier/receiver to analog.
• Check the audio cable connections (page 12).
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.
The picture from the external input
is distorted
• If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot
connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.
The picture is distorted
• Change the Input Line System setting (page 95). (You can also change it by
pressing
STOP REC
and
HDD/DVD
simultaneously with the recorder stopped.)
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 111 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information
14
112
En
Screen is stretched vertically or hori-
zontally
• Make sure that the
TV Screen Size
setting (page 105) is correct for the kind of TV
you have (see also page 110).
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the
input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with ID-1, set the
connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video.
Can’t play a disc recorded using this
recorder on another player
• If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that it’s finalized (page 60).
•Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video
mode and finalized.
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW
compatible in order to play it (page 9).
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM
compatible players (page 48).
During playback the picture is dark
or distorted
• When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display
correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.
Can’t control your TV using this
remote control
• If there is more than one code listed for your make of TV, try each one in turn
(page 109)
• It is possible that none of the codes listed will work with your particular model of
TV, even if the maker appears in the remote control code list.
Can’t record or does not record suc-
cessfully
• Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD (page 86).
• Check that the disc isn’t already finalized.
• The HDD and one DVD disc can contain up to 99 (Original) titles and 999
chapters. Check that these limits have not been reached.
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t protected (page 89).
• Check that you are recording with the same line system as the disc has already
been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same line system (ie.,
PAL, SECAM or NTSC). When recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the
Input Line System setting to match what you want to record (page 95).
Timer program doesn’t record suc-
cessfully
• When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV
tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.
• When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected
cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material
(page 48).
• Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will
record completely.
After briefly unplugging or after a
power failure the front panel dis-
play shows ‘--:--’
• A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from
being reset when there is no power to the recorder. This battery should last
approximately 5 years from factory shipping.
Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again. To have the
battery replaced, contact your dealer or a Pioneer Service Center.
Front panel display shows ‘LOCK’
when a button is pressed
• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 55).
Can’t use One Touch Copy (HDD to
DVD)
• Make sure that there is a recordable DVD loaded with some free space for
recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a
Video mode disc, the disc isn’t finalized.
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One
Touch Copy will not work.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.
Problem Remedy
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 112 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information 14
113
En
English
Note
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
Frequently asked questions
In this section you can find answers to frequently asked
questions on how to use your DVD recorder and what it
can do.
• How do I make a high-quality copy?
We recommend that you use the high-speed copy
mode. Although the copy is faster than real time,
there is no loss of picture or sound quality compared
to the original.
If there is not enough space on the disc to make a
copy at the same picture quality as the original, we
recommend that you change the recording mode to
‘Optimized’. This will fit the recording on to the
available space on the disc.
See also
Copying and back-up
on page 62.
• Can I make a DVD copy of, say, a movie that has had
the commercials edited out?
Yes. There are two ways to do this. You can either edit
the video on the HDD then copy the edited version to
DVD, or you can assemble a Copy List that cuts out
the commercials, then record that to DVD.
See also
Copying and back-up
on page 62.
•I have a two-hour recording on the HDD made in
FINE
mode. Can I copy this to DVD in high-speed mode?
A standard DVD disc can hold only an hour of
FINE
mode material, so you wouldn’t be able to make a
high-speed copy of this on to one disc. You could
divide up the recording on the HDD into two titles of
an hour each and copy these to two DVDs (using
high-speed copy). Alternatively, you could copy the
material in
SP
(or Optimized) so as to fit it all on to one
disc (note that there will be some loss in picture
quality if you do this).
See also
Copying and back-up
on page 62.
•Can I record a bilingual broadcast to the HDD, keeping
both audio channels and switch them on playback?
No. Only the audio channel set in the Bilingual
Recording setting in the Initial Settings menu will be
recorded. If you need to record both channels of
audio, please record using a VR mode DVD-RW disc.
See also
Bilingual Recording
on page 101.
•Can I record continuously on the HDD for more than 6
hours?
No, the maximum continuous recording length is 6
hours. To record something longer than 6 hours, set
up a timer recording for the first 6 hours, then set
more timer recordings as needed for the remainder.
(Note that the recording will not be one continuous
title.)
See also
Setting a timer recording
on page 51.
• Can I copy a finalized Video mode disc (DVD-R or DVD-
RW) to the HDD?
Yes. Start playing the Video mode disc and use the
One Touch Copy button to copy the currently playing
title to the HDD. Repeat for as many titles on the disc
as you want to copy.
See also
One Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD)
on page 63.
• Can I use high-speed copy to copy from DVD to HDD?
You can only use high-speed copy from DVD to HDD
when copying Original titles from a VR mode DVD-
RW.
See also
Copying from DVD to HDD*
on page 70.
Can’t use One Touch Copy (DVD to
HDD)
• Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than
99 titles on the HDD.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.
The picture freezes and the front
panel and remote control buttons
stop working.
• Press the front panel
STANDBY/ON
button to switch the power off, then
switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold
STANDBY/ON
for 10 seconds until the power switches off.
Problem Remedy
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 113 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information
14
114
En
• Can I copy a copy-once protected program from a
subscription satellite or cable channel to a DVD from
the HDD?
Yes, you can use high-speed copy to copy to a VR
mode DVD-RW disc. You can also divide the
recording on the HDD into a number of smaller titles
if the whole recording won’t fit on to one disc.
See also
Copying from HDD to DVD*
on page 64.
•Can I play a DVD I recorded on this recorder on another
DVD player?
Yes, you can generally play DVD-R discs and Video
mode DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder on
any standard DVD player. You may find, however, that
some players will not play some recordable media.
For VR mode DVD-RW discs, look for the ‘RW
Compatible’ mark to see if it will play the disc.
About DV
Using DV, also known as i.LINK, you can connect a DV-
equipped camcorder to this recorder using a single DV
cable for input and output of audio, video, data and
control signals.
The i.LINK interface is also known as IEEE 1394-1995.
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks.
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-format
(DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite tuners and
Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible.
•You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at
a time to this recorder.
• You cannot control this recorder from external
equipment connected via the
DV IN/OUT
jack.
• It may not always be possible to control the
connected camcorder via the
DV IN/OUT
jack.
•This recorder only outputs HDD/DVD playback video
from the
DV IN/OUT
jack; signals from the built-in TV
tuner, CD, Video CD and other inputs are not output.
•Copy-protected or copy-once video is not output from
the
DV IN/OUT
jack.
• Digital camcorders can usually record audio as
stereo 16-bit/48kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/
32kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo
audio track. Set the
DV Input
setting as required (see
DV Input
on page 101).
•Audio output from the
DV IN/OUT
jack is 16-bit only.
• Audio input to the
DV IN/OUT
jack should be 32 or
48kHz (not 44.1kHz).
•Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the
source component pauses playback or plays an
unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the
source component, or the DV cable becomes
disconnected.
DV-related messages
You may see the following messages appear on your TV
screen when using the
DV IN/OUT
jack.
•
No DV camcorder connected.
– The camcorder is
not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched
off.
•
The DV camcorder is recording.
– The camcorder is
recording, so you cannot start recording from the
camcorder to this recorder.
•
You cannot connect more than one DV
camcorder at the same time.
– The DV jack on this
recorder supports connection to just one camcorder.
•
No tape in the DV camcorder.
– There is no
cassette loaded into the connected equipment.
•
The DV camcorder is recording or is record-
paused.
– The camcorder is either in camcorder
mode or record-pause mode. Put it into VTR mode.
•
DV camcorder playback canceled.
Recording has been paused.
– Recording was
paused because the camcorder is not in playback
mode.
•
Cannot operate the DV camcorder.
– This recorder
cannot control the camcorder. Try switching off the
camcorder then switching it back on.
•
Could not operate the DV camcorder.
– This
recorder was not able to control the camcorder.
•
Recording has stopped because the recorded
material on the tape finished.
– When the recorded
part of the DV tape comes to an end, this recorder
automatically stops recording.
•
Recording has stopped because DV camcorder
playback stopped.
– Recording stopped because
DV camcorder playback was stopped or the
camcorder was disconnected.
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 114 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information 14
115
En
English
Manual recording modes
The table below shows the approximate recording times
for all of the 32 manual recording modes, as well as the
standard recording mode equivalents. Levels separated
by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in
picture quality. The divisions for HDD recording are the
same as those for Video mode.
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in
Dolby Digital 2ch format, except for MN32 which is in
Linear PCM format.
VR mode Video mode
Level Rec. time Level Rec. time
MN 1 360 mins.
EP
MN 1 360 mins.
MN 2 345 mins. MN 2 345 mins.
MN 3 330 mins. MN 3 330 mins.
MN 4 315 mins. MN 4 315 mins.
MN 5 300 mins. MN 5 300 mins.
MN 6 285 mins. MN 6 285 mins.
MN 7 270 mins. MN 7 270 mins.
MN 8 255 mins. MN 8 255 mins.
MN 9 240 mins.
LP
MN 9 240 mins.
MN 10 230 mins. MN 10 230 mins.
MN 11 220 mins. MN 11 220 mins.
MN 12 210 mins. MN 12 210 mins.
MN 13 200 mins. MN 13 200 mins.
MN 14 190 mins. MN 14 190 mins.
MN 15 180 mins. MN 15 180 mins.
MN 16 170 mins. MN 16 170 mins.
MN 17 160 mins. MN 17 160 mins.
MN 18 150 mins. MN 18 150 mins.
MN 19 140 mins. MN 19 140 mins.
MN 20 130 mins. MN 20 130 mins.
MN 21 120 mins.
SP
MN 21 120 mins.
MN 22 110 mins. MN 22 110 mins.
MN 23 105 mins. MN 23 105 mins.
MN 24 100 mins. MN 24 100 mins.
MN 25 95 mins. MN 25 95 mins.
MN 26 90 mins. MN 26 90 mins.
MN 27 85 mins. MN 27 85 mins.
MN 28 80 mins. MN 28 80 mins.
MN 29 75 mins. MN 29 75 mins.
MN 30 70 mins. MN 30 70 mins.
MN 31 65 mins. MN 31 65 mins.
MN 32 61 mins.
FINE
MN 32 61 mins.
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 115 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information
14
116
En
Language code list
Language (Language code letter),
Language code
Japanese (ja),
1001
English (en),
0514
French (fr),
0618
German (de),
0405
Italian (it),
0920
Spanish (es),
0519
Chinese (zh),
2608
Dutch (nl),
1412
Portuguese (pt),
1620
Swedish (sv),
1922
Russian (ru),
1821
Korean (ko),
1115
Greek (el),
0512
Afar (aa),
0101
Abkhazian (ab),
0102
Afrikaans (af),
0106
Amharic (am),
0113
Arabic (ar),
0118
Assamese (as),
0119
Aymara (ay),
0125
Azerbaijani (az),
0126
Bashkir (ba),
0201
Byelorussian (be),
0205
Bulgarian (bg),
0207
Bihari (bh),
0208
Bislama (bi),
0209
Bengali (bn),
0214
Tibetan (bo),
0215
Breton (br),
0218
Catalan (ca),
0301
Corsican (co),
0315
Czech (cs),
0319
Welsh (cy),
0325
Danish (da),
0401
Bhutani (dz),
0426
Esperanto (eo),
0515
Estonian (et),
0520
Basque (eu),
0521
Persian (fa),
0601
Finnish (fi),
0609
Fiji (fj),
0610
Faroese (fo),
0615
Frisian (fy),
0625
Irish (ga),
0701
Scots-Gaelic (gd),
0704
Galician (gl),
0712
Guarani (gn),
0714
Gujarati (gu),
0721
Hausa (ha),
0801
Hindi (hi),
0809
Croatian (hr),
0818
Hungarian (hu),
0821
Armenian (hy),
0825
Interlingua (ia),
0901
Interlingue (ie),
0905
Inupiak (ik),
0911
Indonesian (in),
0914
Icelandic (is),
0919
Hebrew (iw),
0923
Yiddish (ji),
1009
Javanese (jw),
1023
Georgian (ka),
1101
Kazakh (kk),
1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Laothian (lo), 1215
Lithuanian (lt), 1220
Latvian (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Nepali (ne), 1405
Norwegian (no), 1415
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Polish (pl), 1612
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Romanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Sangho (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Sinhalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Thai (th), 2008
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tonga (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
Country code list
Country, Country code, Country code letter
Argentina, 0118, ar
Australia, 0121, au
Austria, 0120, at
Belgium, 0205, be
Brazil, 0218, br
Canada, 0301, ca
Chile, 0312, cl
China, 0314, cn
Denmark, 0411, dk
Finland, 0609, fi
France, 0618, fr
Germany, 0405, de
Hong Kong, 0811, hk
India, 0914, in
Indonesia, 0904, id
Italy, 0920, it
Japan, 1016, jp
Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr
Malaysia, 1325, my
Mexico, 1324, mx
Netherlands, 1412, nl
New Zealand, 1426, nz
Norway, 1415, no
Pakistan, 1611, pk
Philippines, 1608, ph
Portugal, 1620, pt
Russian Federation, 1821, ru
Singapore, 1907, sg
Spain, 0519, es
Sweden, 1905, se
Switzerland, 0308, ch
Taiwan, 2023, tw
Thailand, 2008, th
United Kingdom, 0702, gb
USA, 2119, us
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 116 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information 14
117
En
English
On-screen displays and recorder displays
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation
of their meaning.
Message Explanation/Action
• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment.
When you load a blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder automatically
initializes it.
• Incompatible region number.
The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the
recorder and so will not play.
• Cannot record any more titles.
• No more space for file management data.
• Cannot add any more chapter marks.
The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum
number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/
chapters or combine chapters.
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the final-
ization.
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the
finalization in order to recording/editing.
• Cannot play this disc.
• This disc cannot be recorded.
• Cannot read the CPRM information.
• Could not record the information to the disc.
• Cannot edit.
• Could not initialize disc.
• Could not complete finalization successfully.
• Could not undo finalization successfully.
• Could not successfully unlock the disc.
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and
retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even
with a new disc, please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM com-
patible.
• Cannot record this content using Video mode
recording.
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-RW
disc with CPRM for recording.
• This content is copy protected.
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.
• Incorrect CPRM information.
The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder
may be damaged—please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• No DV input.
• Cannot preview because there is no DV input.
No signal was detected at the DV input/output jack. This may
appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected
camcorder.
• The audio will conform to the [Bilingual
Recording] setting.
When recording from an external input in Video mode, or in VR
mode set to MN 32, audio is recorded in Linear PCM format. You
can only record the left or right channel; not both.
• Repairing disc.
During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when
the power is restored.
• Could not repair the disc.
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The
contents of the recording will be lost.
• Overheating has stopped operation.
Press DISPLAY to clear this message.
The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the
operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a
Pioneer authorized service center.
• Playback has stopped because the TV system is
different than the recording.
During recording or timer recording standby, the Line System of
the playback video changed, causing playback to stop
automatically.
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 117 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information
14
118
En
Handling discs
When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave
fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold
the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge.
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and
recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the
label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the
recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc
becoming unusable.
Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust,
etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly
from the center to the outside edge as shown in the
diagram below.
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a
commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a
disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or
other cleaning agents, including products designed for
cleaning vinyl records.
Storing discs
Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl
records, you should still take care to handle and store
discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to
its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including
under direct sunlight).
Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a
pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing
instrument. These could all damage the disc.
For more detailed care information see the instructions
that come with discs.
Do not load more than one disc into the player.
Damaged discs
Discs spin at high speed inside the player. If you can see
that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise
damaged, don't risk using it in your player—you could
end up damaging the unit.
This unit is designed for use with conventional, fully
circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not
recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all
liability arising in connection with the use of shaped
discs.
Cleaning the pickup lens
The DVD player’s lens should not become dirty in normal
use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to
dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-authorized
service center. Although lens cleaners for CD players are
commercially available, we do not recommend using
them since some may damage the lens.
Condensation
Condensation may form inside the player if it is brought
into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of
the room rises quickly. Although the condensation won’t
damage the player, it may temporarily impair its
performance. For this reason you should leave it to adjust
to the warmer temperature for about an hour before
switching on and using.
Hints on installation
We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so
please bear in mind the following points when choosing
a suitable location for it:
Do...
Use in a well-ventilated room.
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table,
shelf or stereo rack.
Don’t...
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or
humidity, including near radiators and other heat-
generating appliances.
Place on a window sill or other place where the player
will be exposed to direct sunlight.
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 118 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information 14
119
En
English
Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room
where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other
component in your stereo system that becomes hot in
use.
Use near a television or monitor as you may
experience interference—especially if the television uses
an indoor antenna.
Use in a kitchen or other room where the player may
be exposed to smoke or steam.
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this
may prevent proper cooling of the unit.
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large
enough to support all four of the unit’s feet.
Moving the recorder
If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if
there’s one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press
STANDBY/ON
to switch the power to standby, checking
that the
POWER OFF
indication in the display goes off.
Lastly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the
unit during playback or recording—discs rotate at a high
speed and may be damaged.
Glossary
Analog audio
An electrical signal that directly represents sound.
Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical
signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See
also
Digital audio
.
Aspect ratio
The width of a TV screen relative to its height.
Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is
almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen
is almost twice as wide as it is high).
Chapter
Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on
the HDD/a DVD disc is usually divided into chapters. See
also
Title
.
Digital audio
An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During
recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals
(44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to-
digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On
playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an
analog signal based on these numbers. See also
Sampling frequency
and
Analog audio
.
Dolby Digital
1
With multichannel audio, this high quality surround
system is used in many movie theaters around the world.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
DTS
DTS stands for Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround
system different from Dolby Digital that has become a
popular surround sound format for movies.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Dynamic range
The difference between the quietest and loudest sounds
possible in an audio signal (without distorting or getting
lost in noise). Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks are
capable of a very wide dynamic range, delivering
dramatic cinema-like effects.
EXIF (Exchangeable Image File)
A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still
cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers
use this compressed file format which carries date, time
and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data.
File extension
A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type
of file. For example, “.mp3” indicates an MP3 file.
ISO 9660 format
International standard for the volume and file structure of
CD-ROM discs.
JPEG
A file format used for still images, such as photographs
and illustrations. JPEG files are identified by the file
extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”. Most digital cameras use this
format.
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 119 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information
14
120
En
MP3
MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed audio file
format. Files are recognized by their file extension “.mp3”
or “.MP3”.
MPEG audio
An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD
discs. This unit can convert MPEG audio to PCM format
for wider compatibility with digital recorders and AV
amplifiers. See also
PCM
.
MPEG video
The video format used for Video CDs and DVDs. Video CD
uses the older MPEG-1 standard, while DVD uses the
newer and much better quality MPEG-2 standard.
Optical digital output
A jack that outputs digital audio in the form of light
pulses. Connect components with optical digital jacks
using a special optical cord, available from specialist
audio dealers.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
The most common system of encoding digital audio,
found on CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a
lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital
and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio
recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amplifiers with
digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and
MPEG audio to PCM. See also
Digital audio
.
PBC (PlayBack Control) (Video CD/Super VCD only)
A system of navigating a Video CD/Super VCD through
on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. Especially good
for discs that you would normally not watch from
beginning to end all at once—karaoke discs, for example.
Regions (DVD only)
(example region code marks)
Regions associate discs and players with particular
areas of the world. This unit will only play discs that have
compatible region codes. You can find the region code of
your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are
compatible with more than one region (or all regions).
Sampling frequency
The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into
digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the
sound quality, but the more digital information is
generated. Standard CD audio has a sampling frequency
of 44.1kHz, which means 44,100 samples
(measurements) per second. See also
Digital audio
.
Title
A collection of chapters on a the HDD/DVD disc. See also
Chapter
.
Track
Audio CDs and Video CDs use tracks to divide up the
content of a disc. The DVD equivalent is called a chapter.
See also
Chapter
.
WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an
audio compression technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using
Windows Media Player version 9 or Windows Media
Player for Windows XP. Files are recognized by their file
extension “.wma” or “.WMA”.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
2ALL
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 120 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information 14
121
En
English
Specifications
General
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDD, DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW,
Video-CD, CD, CD-R/RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA)
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 W
Power consumption in standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 W
(FL off)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 kg
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 (W) x 69 (H) x 341 (D) mm
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+5°C to +35°C
Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5% to 85%
(no condensation)
TV system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/
NTSC (external input only)
Recording
Recording format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD Video Recording
DVD-VIDEO
Recordable discs
DVD-RW (DVD Re-recordable disc)
DVD-R (DVD Recordable disc)
Video recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5MHz
Compression format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG
Audio recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48kHz
Compression format. . . . . . . . .Dolby Digital or Linear PCM
(uncompressed)
Recording time
HDD
Fine (FINE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 hours
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 hours
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 hours
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 102 hours
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17–102 hours
DVD-R/DVD-RW
Fine (FINE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 hour
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 hours
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 hours
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 hours
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1–6 hours
Tuner
Receivable channels
Timer
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)
Power off memory . . . .Approx. 5 years (after manufacture)
Input/Output
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal . . . . VHF/UHF set
75
Ω
(IEC connector)
Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front)
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75
Ω
)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1),
RCA jack (Input 2, 3)
Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output 1,2
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75
Ω
)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (Output 1)
RCA jack (Output 2)
S-Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front)
Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75
Ω
)
C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75
Ω
)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1),
4 pin mini DIN (Input 2,3)
S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output 1,2
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75
Ω
)
C (colour) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75
Ω
)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (Output 1),
4 pin mini DIN (Output 2)
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
Hyper
UHF
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
Hyper
UHF
STEREO
B/G - A2
I - NICAM
L - NICAM
B/G - NICAM
D/K - NICAM
Channel
E2 - E4
X - Z
E5 - E12
S1 - S20
M1 - M10
U1 - U10
S21 - S41
E21 - E69
Frequency
47 - 89 MHz
104 - 300 MHz
302 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
Channel
A - C
X - Z
D - J
11, 13
S1 - S20
S21 - S41
E21 - E69
Frequency
44 - 89 MHz
104 - 300 MHz
302 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
PAL B/G PAL I
Channel
2 - 4
5 - 10
B - Q
S21 - S41
21 - 69
Frequency
49 - 65 MHz
104 - 300 MHz
300 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
Channel
R1 - R5
R6 - R12
S1 - S20
S21 - S41
E21 - E69
Frequency
49 - 94 MHz
104 - 300 MHz
302 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
SECAM L SECAM D/K
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 121 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information
14
122
En
Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front) L/R
Input level
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2V rms
(Input impedance: more than 22 k
Ω
)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1),
RCA jacks (Inputs 2,3)
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output 1,2 L/R
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2V rms
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 k
Ω
)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (output 1),
RCA jacks (output 2)
Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack
DV input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)
AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)
AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector
This connector provides the video and audio signals for
connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.
PIN no.
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G* out
3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R* or C* out
4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B* out
19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Video out or Y* out
8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status
21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
* AV CONNECTOR 1(RGB)-TV is output
Supplied accessories
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Operating Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject
to change without notice, due to improvement.
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 122 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information 14
123
En
English
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 123 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information
14
124
En
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 124 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Additional information 14
125
En
English
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 125 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Index
126
En
Index
A
Adjusting the picture quality
91–93
Audio DRC
93
Audio language
23, 45, 102
Audio settings
100–102
Auto language
102, 103, 104
Auto Scan - see Automatic channel setup
Automatic channel setup
25, 96
AV amplifier (connecting to)
19, 27
AV connector
12, 14–18, 95, 97, 99, 122
B
Bilingual audio
22, 30, 45, 48, 50, 100, 101, 113
C
Camcorder - see DV camcorder
Changing TV channels
29, 109
Chase play - see Simultaneous recording and playback
Copy List
64–72, 105, 113
CPRM
48, 117
D
Disc and file formats
9, 110
Disc compatibility - see Disc and file formats
Disc Navigator
37–38, 74–85, 105
Dolby Digital
6, 27, 45, 46, 48, 93, 101, 119
Downloading channel presets from the TV
13, 25, 97
DV camcorder
7, 12, 20, 58, 59, 114
E
Easy timer recording
6, 51
Editing recordings
74–85
F
Finalizing discs
34, 60, 90
I
Initializing discs
47, 61, 90, 105
Input colour system
95, 99
Input line system
95, 99, 100
J
JPEG picture files
7, 9, 10, 35, 87–88, 119
M
Manual channel setup
97
Manual recording mode (MN)
22, 49, 104, 115
MP3 audio
7, 9, 32, 120
MPEG audio
12, 102, 120
N
NICAM audio
29, 100
NTSC
22, 47, 92, 93, 95, 99, 100
O
One-touch copy
6, 23, 62, 63–64, 113
One-touch recording
6, 50
On-screen display (OSD)
34, 102
Optimized recording
7, 53, 65, 104, 113
Original content
7, 11, 23, 34, 74, 76, 77–81, 83
OSD - see On-screen display (OSD)
P
PAL
42, 47, 95, 96, 99, 100
PBC (PlayBack Control for Video CD)
33, 37, 120
PhotoViewer
87–88
Picture quality - see Adjusting the picture quality and Re-
cording quality
Play List
7, 11, 22, 23, 34, 74, 77, 82–85
Play Mode menu
23, 42–45
Program play
43, 44–45
R
Recording
6–7, 28, 35, 47–61
Recording quality
47, 49, 91
Recovery recording
7, 51, 53
Remote control 8, 23, 96
Repeat play 43, 45
Rotating (a JPEG picture) 88
S
Scanning 24, 40
SCART - see AV connector
SECAM 47, 95, 96, 99
Setting up 25–27, 109
ShowView 6, 23, 54–55, 98
Simultaneous recording and playback 6, 35, 56
Slow motion playback 41
Subtitle langauge 23, 45, 103
T
Timer recording 6, 13, 17, 22, 24, 35, 51–56, 57
TV aspect ratio 105, 110
TV audio channel 29, 50, 100, 101
TV system - see Input line system and Input colour system
V
Video mode 7, 9, 10, 22, 36, 47, 60, 61, 62, 90, 105, 113,
115
Video settings 91–93, 99–100
Virtual Surround 93
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 126 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
Index
127
En
English
VPS/PDC
6, 22, 51, 52, 53, 54, 56
VR mode
10, 22, 47, 50, 60, 61, 63, 77, 82, 90, 105, 106,
113, 115
W
WMA audio
7, 9, 32, 120
Z
Zooming (a JPEG picture)
88
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 127 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: (905) 479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 656-472-1111
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002E
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2003 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
<VRB1317-A><03G00001> Printed in China
DVR-03_HDD_EU.book 128 ページ ２００３年９月１６日 火曜日 午後１２時２３分
